Xerox WorkCentre 5945/5955 User guide

Version 1.0

July 2014

Xerox

®

WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Multifunction Printer

User Guide

©2014 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. Xerox

®

and Xerox and Design

®

are trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Version 1.0

July 2014

WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Contents

1 Safety and Regulations

Notices and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Safety Labels and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Operational Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Electrical Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Maintenance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Consumables Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Product Safety Certification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Basic Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Ozone Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

United States (FCC Regulations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Canada (Regulations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

European Union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

European Union Lot 4 Imaging Equipment Agreement Environmental

Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Turkey RoHS Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Regulatory Information for 2.4 GHz Wireless Network Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Eurasia Economic Community (EAC Mark) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Copy Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Other Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Fax Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

United States Fax Header Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Europe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

South Africa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

New Zealand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Product Recycling and Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

USA and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

European Union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Energy Program Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

All Markets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Germany . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Material Safety Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Environment, Health and Safety Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

2 Getting Started

Identifying the Parts of Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Locating the Serial Number for Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Services and Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Identifying the WorkCentre 5945 Standard and Optional Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Identifying the WorkCentre 5955 Standard and Optional Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Describing the Finishing Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Identifying the Control Panel Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Power On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

User Guide 1

2

WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Powering the Device On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Powering the Device Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Using the Energy Saver Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Loading Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Making Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Printing a Document using the PostScript Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Printing a Document using the PCL Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Printing a Document using the Mac Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Printing a Document using the XPS Print Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Explaining the Fax Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Faxing from the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Faxing from your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Using Workflow Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Sending an E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Saved Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Saving Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Printing Saved Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Enhancing Productivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Maintenance and Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Identifying the Replaceable Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Cleaning the Document Glass and Constant Velocity Transport Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Cleaning the Control Panel, Touch Screen, Document Feeder and Output Trays . . 71

Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Accessing the Help Features On the Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Accessing the PostScript Print Driver Help Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Accessing the PCL Print Driver Help Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Accessing the Mac Print Driver Help Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Accessing the XPS Print Driver Help Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Using the Internet Services Help Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Getting Further Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

3 Copy

Making Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Copy Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Reduce or Enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Setting the Paper Supply for Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Making 2 Sided Copies or Copying 2 Sided Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Copy Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Image Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Setting the Original Type for Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Image Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Image Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Layout Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Setting the Original Orientation for Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Specifying the Size of the Original to be Copied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Copying Book Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Using the Image Shift Feature to Reposition the Copy Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Erasing Edges from Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Creating Copies with an Inverted Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

User Guide

WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Making Copies into a Booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Special Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Annotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Using Transparency Separators within Copy Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Copying Multiple Pages or Repeat Images onto a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Job Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Building a Copy Job with Multiple Page or Segment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Printing a Sample of Build Job Copy Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Saving Current Settings for Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Retrieving Saved Settings for Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Deleting Saved Settings for Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

4 Fax

Fax (Embedded Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Sending a Fax (Embedded Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Layout Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Fax Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Building a Fax Job with Multiple Page or Segment Settings (Embedded Fax) . . . . 166

Server Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Sending a Server Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Sending a Server Fax using the Workflow Scanning Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Server Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176


Using a Timer to Send a Server Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Building a Server Fax Job with Multiple Page or Segment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Internet Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Sending an Internet Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Internet Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194


Internet Fax Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Building an Internet Fax Job with Multiple Page or Segment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 216

5 Scan

Workflow Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Explaining What Workflow Scanning Does and How It Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Using Workflow Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Workflow Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221



Filing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Building a Workflow Scanning Job with Multiple Page or Segment Settings . . . . . 256

Scan To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Using the Scan To Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Scanning to a Favorite Address using the Scan To Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Scan To. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262



Filing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Building a Job with Multiple Page or Segment Settings using the

User Guide 3

4

WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Scan To Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Scanning to a USB Memory Stick using the Scan To Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Single-Touch Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Scanning a Document to your Computer or Network using Single-Touch Scan . . . 288

Building a Single-Touch Scan Job with Multiple Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Setting the Output Color for a Single-Touch Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Using Single-Touch Scan to Send 2-Sided Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Setting the Original Type for Single-Touch Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Specifying a File Name for Single-Touch Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Remote Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Scanning an image using the Xerox TWAIN Scan Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Accessing the TWAIN Scan Driver Help Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

6 Print

PCL Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Printing a Document using the PCL Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Tab menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Menu at the bottom of the Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Viewing the Device Status using the PCL Print Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

PostScript Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Printing a Document using the PostScript Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Tab menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354


Viewing the Device Status using the PostScript Print Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

XPS Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Printing a Document using the XPS Print Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Tab menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412


Viewing the Device Status using the XPS Print Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

Mac Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Printing a Document using the Mac Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Xerox Features Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Other Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Print From. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Printing a Saved Job using the Print From Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Printing From a Mailbox using the Print From Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

Printing From USB using the Print From Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

7 E-Mail

Sending an E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

E-Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Sending an E-mail to an Address Book Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Sending an E-mail to a Recipient Saved as a Favorite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

Setting the Output Color for an E-mail Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

Using E-mail to send 2-Sided Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Setting the Original Type for E-mails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

Specifying a File Name for E-mail Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

Advanced Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

Image Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

Image Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

Setting the E-mail Scan Presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Specifying the E-mail Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

Setting the Quality or File Size for E-mail Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

User Guide

WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Layout Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

Setting the Original Orientation for E-mails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

Specifying the Size of the Original to be E-mailed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

Erasing Edges from E-mail Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

Removing Blank Pages from E-mail Originals During Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

E-mail Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

Setting a File Format for E-mail Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

Adding a Message to an E-mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

Adding a Reply To Address to an E-mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

Building an E-mail Job with Multiple Page or Segment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

8 ID Card Copy

Making Copies of ID Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Copy Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

Reduce or Enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

Setting the Paper Supply for ID Card Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

Image Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

Setting the Original Type for ID Card Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

Lightening or Darkening Copies of ID Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Setting the Background Suppression for ID Card Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

9 Internet Services

Using Internet Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

Tab menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

Using the Properties page in Internet Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632

Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633

Top right menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

Logging in to Internet Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

Logging out of Internet Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

Using the Index in Internet Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641

Using the Site Map in Internet Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641

Using the Home link in Internet Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

Using the Internet Services Help Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643

10 Paper and Media

Loading Tray 1 and Changing the Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

Changing the paper tray settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

Loading Tray 2 and Changing the Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647


Loading the Optional Envelope Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

Loading Tray 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

Loading Tray 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

Loading the Bypass Tray and Changing the Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653


Loading Different Types of Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Punched . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655

Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656

User Guide 5

6

WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

11 Machine and Job Status

Job Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

Active Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

Accessing Your Personal Secure Jobs List using the Job Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

Viewing Completed Jobs using the Job Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

Machine Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

Viewing Machine Information from the Machine Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

Viewing the Status of Paper Trays from the Machine Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

Printing the Information Pages from the Machine Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

Viewing the Status of Installed Options using the Machine Status Menu . . . . . . . . 666

Using the Maintenance Assistant from the Machine Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666

Faults and Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667

Checking the Status of Supplies using the Machine Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668

Billing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668

12 Administration and Accounting

Using a User ID to Log In at the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671

Logging out at the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Accessing the Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Device Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

Adjusting the Display Brightness using the Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675

Checking the Device Network Connection using the Echo Test Option within the

Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675

Perform a Software Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676

13 Feature Installation

Using the Software Activation Portal (SWAP) to obtain a Feature Installation Key . . . . 677

14 General Care and Troubleshooting

General Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

Customer Replaceable Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

Staple Cartridges and Hole Punch Waste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682

Cleaning the Document Glass and Both Constant Velocity Transport Glass Strips . . . .

684

Cleaning the Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

Cleaning the Control Panel, Touch Screen, Document Feeder and Output Trays . 685

Storing Paper and Other Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

Avoiding Poor Quality Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

Understanding Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687

Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712

Getting Further Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720

User Guide

Safety and Regulations

1

Notices and Safety

Please read the following instructions carefully before operating the device. Refer to them as needed to ensure the continued safe operation of your device.

Your Xerox device and supplies have been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements.

These include safety agency evaluation and certification, and compliance with electromagnetic regulations and established environmental standards.

The safety and environment testing and performance of this device have been verified using Xerox materials only.

!

WARNING

Unauthorized alterations, which may include the addition of new functions or connection of external devices, may impact the device certification. Please contact your Xerox representative for more information.

Safety Labels and Symbols

All warnings and instructions marked on or supplied for the device should be followed.

!

WARNING

This WARNING alerts users to areas of the device where there is the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING

This WARNING alerts users to areas of the device where there are heated surfaces, which should not be touched.

!

Caution

This symbol alerts users to areas of the equipment which require special attention to avoid the possibility of personal injury or damage to the equipment. A symbol for items that must be performed.

Follow instructions carefully to carry out these essential tasks.

User Guide 7

8

Safety and Regulations WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Operational Safety Information

Your Xerox device and supplies have been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements.

These include safety agency examination, approval, and compliance with established environmental standards. To ensure the continued safe operation of your Xerox device, follow the safety guidelines on this website at all times.

Electrical Supply

This document provides important electrical supply safety information that you should read before installing or using the device.

Read the information in the following sections:

• Power Outlet Electrical Safety

• Power Cord Electrical Safety

• Device Safety

• Emergency Power Off

• Disconnect Device

Power Outlet Electrical Safety

This device must be operated from the type of electrical supply indicated on the data plate label located on the rear cover of the device. If you are not sure that your electrical supply meets the requirements, please consult your local power company or a licensed electrician for advice.

The electrical supply outlet should be installed near the device and should be easily accessible.

WARNING

This device must be connected to a protective earth circuit. This device is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin. This plug will only fit into an earthed electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet. Always connect the device to a correctly grounded power outlet. If in doubt, have the outlet checked by a qualified electrician. Improper connection of the device-grounding conductor can result in electrical shock.

Power Cord Electrical Safety

• Use only the power cord supplied with this device.

• Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet. Do not use an extension cord. If you do not know whether or not an outlet is grounded, consult a qualified electrician.

• Do not place this device where people might step on or trip on the power cord.

• Do not place objects on the power cord.

• To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 American Wire Gauge (AWG) or larger telecommunication line cord.

User Guide


®

5945/5955

Device Safety

This device has been designed to provide operator access to safe areas only. Operator access to hazardous areas is restricted using covers or guards, which require a tool to enable removal. Never remove the covers or guards that protect hazardous areas.

Device Safety - Do These

• Always follow all warnings and instructions that are marked on or supplied with the device.

• Before cleaning this device, switch off then unplug the device from the electrical outlet. Always use materials specifically designated for this device, the use of other materials may result in poor performance and create a hazardous situation.

• Always exercise care when moving or relocating the device. Please contact your local Xerox dealer to arrange relocation of the device to a location outside of your building.

• Always locate the device on a solid support surface (not on plush carpet) that has adequate strength to support the weight of the machine.

• Always locate the device in an area that has adequate ventilation and room for servicing.

Note: Your Xerox device is equipped with an energy saving function to conserve power when the device is not in use. The device may be left on continuously.

Device Safety - Do Not Do These

!

WARNING

Do not use aerosol cleaners. Aerosol cleaners can be explosive or flammable when used on electromechanical equipment.

• Never use a ground adapter plug to connect the device to a power outlet that lacks a ground connection terminal.

• Never attempt any maintenance function that is not specifically described in this documentation.

• Never obstruct ventilation openings. They are provided to prevent overheating.

• Never remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws. There are no operator serviceable areas within these covers.

• Never locate the machine near a radiator or any other heat source.

• Never push objects of any kind into the ventilation openings.

• Never override or “cheat” any of the electrical or mechanical interlock devices.

• Never place this device where people might step on or trip on the power cord.

• This device should not be placed in a room unless proper ventilation is provided.

Please contact your local Authorized dealer for further information.

User Guide 9


®

5945/5955

Emergency Power Off

If any of the following conditions occur, turn off the device immediately switch off the device and disconnect the power cable(s) from the electrical outlet(s). Contact an authorized Xerox Service

Representative to correct the problem:

• The device emits unusual odors or makes unusual noises.

• The power cable is damaged or frayed.

• A wall panel circuit breaker, fuse, or other safety device has been tripped.

• Liquid is spilled into the machine.

• The machine is exposed to water.

• Any part of the device is damaged.

Disconnect Device

The power cable is the disconnect device for this device. It is attached to the back of the machine as a plug-in device. To remove all electrical power from the device, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet.

Maintenance Information

!

WARNING

Do not use aerosol cleaners. Aerosol cleaners can be explosive or flammable when used on electromechanical equipment.

• Any operator device maintenance procedures will be described in the user documentation supplied with the device.

• Do not carry out any maintenance on this device which is not described in the customer documentation.

• Use supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in the user documentation.

• Do not remove covers or guards that are fastened with screws. There are no parts behind these covers that you can maintain or service.

Consumables Information

• Store all consumables in accordance with the instructions given on the package or container.

• Keep all consumables away from the reach of children.

• Never throw toner, toner cartridges or toner containers into an open flame.

• When handling cartridges, for example ink, fuser, etc. avoid skin or eye contact. Eye contact can cause irritation and inflammation. Do not attempt to disassemble the cartridge. This can increase the risk of skin or eye contact.

• Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Sweep slowly to minimize generation of dust during clean up. Avoid using a vacuum cleaner. If a vacuum cleaner must be used, the unit should be designed for combustible dusts (e.g. explosion rated motor and conductive hose).

10 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Product Safety Certification

This product is certified by the following Agency using the Safety standards listed below.

Agency

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (US / Canada)

Standard

UL60950-1 (2007) 2nd Edition

CSA 22.2 no. 60950-1-07 2nd Edition

IEC60950-1:2005, (2nd Edition) +A1:2009

EN60950-1:2006 (2nd Edition)

+A11:2009;+A1:2010;+A12:2011 (CB

Scheme) Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (Europe)

This device has been manufactured under a registered ISO9001 Quality system.

Basic Regulations

Xerox has tested this device to electromagnetic emission and immunity standards. These standards are designed to mitigate interference caused or received by this device in a typical office environment.

Ozone Safety Information

This product produces ozone during normal operation. The ozone produced is heavier than air and is dependent on copy volume. Install the system in a well-ventilated room. If you need additional information about ozone, please request the Xerox publication Facts About Ozone (part number

610P64653) by calling 1-800-ASK-XEROX in the United States and Canada. In other markets, please contact your local Xerox representative.

United States (FCC Regulations)

This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If it is not installed and used in accordance with these instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her own expense.

If this device does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiver.

• Increase the separation between the device and receiver.

• Connect the device into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.

User Guide 11


®

5945/5955

Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Xerox could void the user's authority to operate the device.

!

WARNING

Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with FCC regulations.

Canada (Regulations)

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

European Union

!

WARNING

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this device may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

The CE mark applied to this device symbolizes Xerox’s declaration of conformity with the following applicable Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:

• December 12, 2006: Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC. Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.

• December 15, 2004: Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/108/EC. Approximation of the laws of the member states related to electromagnetic compatibility.

• March 9, 1999: Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 1999/5/EC.

• June 8, 2011: Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. Directive 2011/65/EU.

This device, if used properly in accordance with the user's instructions, is neither dangerous for the consumer nor for the environment.

To ensure compliance with European Union regulations, use shielded interface cables.

A signed copy of the Declaration of Conformity for this device can be obtained from Xerox.

European Union Lot 4 Imaging Equipment Agreement

Environmental Information

Environmental Information Providing Environmental Solutions and Reducing

Cost

Introduction

The following information has been developed to assist users and has been issued in relation to the

European Union (EU) Energy Related Products Directive, specifically the Lot 4 study on Imaging

Equipment. This requires manufacturers to improve environmental performance of in scope products and supports the EU action plan on energy efficiency.

12 User Guide


®

5945/5955

In scope products are Household and Office equipment that meet the following criteria.

• Standard monochrome format products with a maximum speed less than 64 A4 images per minute.

• Standard color format products with a maximum speed less than 51 A4 images per minute.

Environmental Benefits of Duplex Printing

Most Xerox products have duplex printing, also known as 2-sided printing, capability. This enables you to print on both sides of the paper automatically, and therefore helps to reduce the use of valuable resources by reducing your paper consumption. The Lot 4 Imaging Equipment agreement requires that on models greater than or equal to 40 ppm color or greater than or equal to 45 ppm monochrome the duplex function has been auto enabled, during the setup and driver installation.

Some Xerox models below these speed bands may also be enabled with 2-sided printing settings defaulted on at the time of install. Continuing to use the duplex function will reduce the environmental impact of your work. However, should you require simplex / 1-sided printing, you may change the print settings in the print driver.

Paper Types

This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper, approved to an environmental stewardship scheme, which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. Lighter weight paper (60 gsm), which contains less raw material and thus saves resources per print, may be used in certain applications. We encourage you to check if this is suitable for your printing needs.

Turkey RoHS Regulation

In compliance with Article 7 (d). We hereby certify

"It is compliant with the EEE Regulation."

"EEE yönetmeliðine uygundur"

Regulatory Information for 2.4 GHz Wireless Network Adapter

This product contains a 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN radio transmitter module which complies with the requirements specified in FCC Part 15, Industry Canada RSS-210 and European Council Directive

99/5/EC.

The operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference recieved, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications to this device not specifically approved by the Xerox Corporation may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Eurasia Economic Community (EAC Mark)

User Guide

Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan are working to establish a common customs union which will be known as the Eurasian Economic Community or EurAsEC. This union has announced a common regulatory scheme and a EurAsEC certification Mark (EAC

Mark).

13


®

5945/5955

Copy Regulations

United States

Congress, by statute, has forbidden the reproduction of the following subjects under certain circumstances. Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such reproductions.

1. Obligations or Securities of the United States Government, such as:

• Certificates of Indebtedness

• National Bank Currency

• Coupons from Bonds

• Federal Reserve Bank Notes

• Silver Certificates

• Gold Certificates

• United States Bonds

• Treasury Notes

• Federal Reserve Notes

• Fractional Notes

• Certificates of Deposit

• Paper Money

• Bonds and Obligations of certain agencies of the government, such as FHA, etc.

• Bonds (U.S. Savings Bonds may be photographed only for publicity purposes in connection with the campaign for the sale of such bonds.)

• Internal Revenue Stamps. If it is necessary to reproduce a legal document on which there is a canceled revenue stamp, this may be done provided the reproduction of the document is performed for lawful purposes.

• Postage Stamps, canceled or uncanceled. For philatelic purposes, Postage Stamps may be photographed, provided the reproduction is in black and white and is less than 75% or more than 150% of the linear dimensions of the original.

• Postal Money Orders

• Bills, Checks, or Draft of money drawn by or upon authorized officers of the United States.

• Stamps and other representatives of value, of whatever denomination, which have been or may be issued under any Act of Congress.

2. Adjusted Compensation Certificates for Veterans of the World Wars.

3. Obligations or Securities of any Foreign Government, Bank, or Corporation.

4. Copyrighted materials, unless permission of the copyright owner has been obtained or the reproduction falls within the “fair use” or library reproduction rights provisions of the copyright law.

Further information of these provisions may be obtained from the Copyright Office, Library of

Congress, Washington, D.C. 20559. Ask for Circular R21.5.

5. Certificate of Citizenship or Naturalization. Foreign Naturalization Certificates may be photographed.

6. Passports. Foreign Passports may be photographed.

8. Draft Registration Cards

9. Selective Service Induction papers that bear any of the following Registrant’s information:

14 User Guide


®

5945/5955

• Earnings or Income

• Court Record

• Physical or mental condition

• Dependency Status

• Previous military service

Exception: United States military discharge certificates may be photographed.

10. Badges, Identification Cards, Passes, or Insignia carried by military personnel, or by members of the various Federal Departments, such as FBI, Treasure, etc. (Unless photograph is ordered by the head of such department or bureau.)

Reproducing the following is also prohibited in certain states:

• Automobile Licenses

• Drivers’ Licenses

• Automobile Certificates of Title

The above list is not all inclusive, and no liability is assumed for its completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, consult your attorney.

Canada

Parliament, by statute, has forbidden the reproduction of the following subjects under certain circumstances. Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such reproductions.

1. Current bank notes or current paper money.

2. Obligations or securities of a government or bank.

3. Exchequer bill paper or revenue paper.

4. The public seal of Canada or of a province, or the seal of a public body or authority in Canada, or of a court of law.

5. Proclamations, orders, regulations or appointments, or notices thereof (with intent to falsely cause same to purport to have been printed by the Queen’s Printer for Canada, or the equivalent printer for a province).

6. Marks, brands, seals, wrappers or designs used by or on behalf of the Government of Canada or of a province, the government of a state other than Canada or a department, board,

Commission or agency established by the Government of Canada or of a province or of a government of a state other than Canada.

7. Impressed or adhesive stamps used for the purpose of revenue by the Government of Canada or of a province or by the government of a state other than Canada.

8. Documents, registers or records kept by public officials charged with the duty of making or issuing certified copies thereof, where the copy falsely purports to be a certified copy thereof.

9. Copyrighted material or trademarks of any manner or kind without the consent of the copyright or trademark owner.

The above list is provided for your convenience and assistance, but it is not all-inclusive, and no liability is assumed for its completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, consult your solicitor.

User Guide 15

16


®

5945/5955

Other Countries

Copying certain documents may be illegal in your country. Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty of making such reproductions:

• Currency notes

• Bank notes and cheques

• Bank and government bonds and securities

• Passports and identification cards

• Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner

• Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments

This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, contact your legal counsel.

Fax Regulations

United States Fax Header Requirements

Fax Send Header Requirements

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity or individual. The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges.

In order to program this information into your machine, refer to the customer documentation and follow the steps provided.

Data Coupler Information

This device complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the

Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the cover of this device is a label that contains, among other information, a device identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the Telephone Company. A plug and jack used to connect this device to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable

FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this device. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details.

You may safely connect the device to the following standard modular jack: USOC RJ-11C using the compliant telephone line cord (with modular plugs) provided with the installation kit. See installation instructions for details.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not

User Guide


®

5945/5955 exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local Telephone Company. For products approved after

July 23, 2001, the REN for this device is part of the device identifier that has the format

US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.

To order the correct service from the local telephone company, you may also have to quote the codes listed below:

• Facility Interface Code (FIC) = 02LS2

• Service Order Code (SOC) = 9.0Y

!

WARNING

Ask your local telephone company for the modular jack type installed on your line. Connecting this machine to an unauthorized jack can damage telephone company equipment. You, not Xerox, assume all responsibility and/or liability for any damage caused by the connection of this machine to an unauthorized jack.

If this Xerox device causes harm to the telephone network, the Telephone Company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the Telephone Company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.

The Telephone Company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the device. If this happens, the Telephone Company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.

If trouble is experienced with this Xerox device, for repair or warranty information, please contact the appropriate service center; details of which are displayed either on the machine or contained within the User Guide. If the device is causing harm to the telephone network, the Telephone

Company may request that you disconnect the device until the problem is resolved.

Repairs to the machine should be made only by a Xerox Service Representative or an authorized

Xerox Service provider. This applies at any time during or after the service warranty period. If unauthorized repair is performed, the remainder of the warranty period is null and void.

This device must not be used on party lines. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.

If your office has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, make sure that the installation of this Xerox device does not disable your alarm equipment.

If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your Telephone Company or a qualified installer.

Canada

Note: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the device meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The

Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.

User Guide 17


®

5945/5955

Before installing this device, users must make sure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The device must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this device, or device malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the device.

Users should make sure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe systems, if present, are connected together.

This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.

!

Caution

Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalent Numbers of all of the devices does not exceed

5. For the Canadian REN value, please see the label on the device.

Canada CS-03 issue 9:

This product has been tested to and is compliant with CS-03 issue 9.

Europe

Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive

This Xerox product has been self-certified by Xerox for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC.

The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the following countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia,

Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg,

Malta, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, United

Kingdom, Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway.

In the event of problems, you should contact your local Xerox representative in the first instance.This product has been tested to and is compliant with TBR21 OR ES 103 021-1/2/3 or ES

203 021-1/2/3, technical specifications for terminal equipment for use on analogue-switched telephone networks in the European Economic Area.The product may be configured to be compatible with other country networks.Please contact your Xerox representative if it needs to be reconnected to another country's network.

Note: Although this product can use either loop disconnect (pulse) or DTMF (tone) signaling it is recommended that it is set to use DTMF signaling. DTMF signaling provides reliable and faster call setup. Modification, connection to external control software or to external controlapparatus not authorized by Xerox, will invalidate its certification.

18 User Guide


®

5945/5955

South Africa

This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device.

New Zealand

The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, it does not provide any sort of warranty, and it does not imply that any Telepermitted product is compatible with all Telecom network services.

Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model.

The equipment may not be capable of correct operation at the higher data speeds designated.

33.8 kbps and 56 kbps connections are likely to be restricted to lower bit rates when connected to some PSTN implementations. Telecom will accept no responsibility for difficulties that arise in such circumstances.

• Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become physically damaged, then arrange for its disposal or repair.

• This modem shall not be used in any manner which could constitute a nuisance to other

Telecom customers.

• This device is equipped with pulse dialling, while the Telecom standard is DTMF tone dialling.

There is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialling.

• Use of pulse dialling, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to ‘bell tinkle’ or noise and cause a false answer condition. If you encounter such problems, do not contact the Telecom Faults Service.

• DTMF tones dialling is the preferred method because it is faster than pulse (decadic) dialling and is readily available on almost all New Zealand telephone exchanges.

!

WARNING

No ‘111’ or other calls can be made from this device during a mains power failure.

• This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.

• Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (computer) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom

Specifications:

• For repeat calls to the same number:

• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and

• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt.

• For automatic calls to different numbers:

• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is no less than five seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

• For correct operation, total of the RNs of all devices connected to a single line at any time should not exceed five.

User Guide 19

20


®

5945/5955

Product Recycling and Disposal

USA and Canada

Xerox operates a worldwide equipment takeback and reuse/recycle program. Contact your Xerox sales representative (1-800-ASK-XEROX) to determine whether this Xerox device is part of the program. For more information about Xerox environmental programs, visit www.xerox.com/ environment.html.

If you are managing the disposal of your Xerox device, please note that the device may contain lead, mercury, perchlorate, and other materials whose disposal may be regulated due to environmental considerations. The presence of these materials is fully consistent with global regulations applicable at the time that the device was placed on the market. For recycling and disposal information, contact your local authorities. In the United States, you may also refer to the

Electronic Industries Alliance web site: http://www.eiae.org/ .

European Union

WEEE Directive 2002/96/EC

Some equipment may be used in both a domestic/household and a professional/business application.

Professional/Business Environment

Application of this symbol on your device is confirmation that you must dispose of this device in compliance with agreed national procedures. In accordance with

European legislation, end of life electrical and electronic equipment subject to disposal must be managed within agreed procedures.

Domestic/Household Environment

Application of this symbol on your device is confirmation that you should not dispose of the device in the normal household waste stream. In accordance with European legislation, end of life electrical and electronic equipment subject to disposal must be segregated from household waste. Private households within EU member states may return used electrical and electronic equipment to designated collection facilities free of charge. Please contact your local disposal authority for information. In some member states, when you purchase new device, your local retailer may be required to take back your old device free of charge. Please ask you retailer for information. Prior to disposal, please contact your local dealer or Xerox representative for end of life takeback information.

User Guide


®

5945/5955

Energy Program Compliance

All Markets

ENERGY STAR

The Xerox WorkCentre® 5945 / 5955 is ENERGY STAR® qualified under the

ENERGY STAR Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment.

The ENERGY STAR and ENERGY STAR MARK are registered United States trademarks. The ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is a team effort between

U.S., European Union and Japanese governments and the office equipment industry to promote energy-efficient copiers, printers, fax, multifunction devices, personal computers, and monitors. Reducing device energy consumption helps combat smog, acid rain and long-term changes to the climate by decreasing the emissions that result from generating electricity. Xerox ENERGY STAR equipment is preset at the factory.

The ENERGY STAR program is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of energy efficient models, which help to reduce environmental impact. Details on the ENERGY STAR program and models qualified to ENERGY STAR can be found in the website below - http:// www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?fuseaction=find_a_product.showProductGroup&pgw_code=IEQ

Power Consumption and Activation Time

The amount of electricity a product consumes depends on the way the device is used. This product is designed and configured to enable you to reduce your electricity costs. After the last print it switches to Ready Mode. In this mode it can print again immediately if required. If the product is not used for a period of time, the device switches to a Power Saver Mode. In these modes, only essential functions remain active in order to enable reduced product power consumption. Upon exiting from Power Saver Mode, the first print will take slightly longer than in Ready Mode. This delay is the result of the system “waking up” from Power Saver mode and is typical of most imaging products on the market. If you wish to set a longer Activation Time or would like to completely deactivate the Power Save Mode, please consider that this device may then only switch to a lower energy level after a longer period of time or not at all.To learn more about Xerox’s participation in sustainability initiatives, please visit our site at: http://www.xerox.com/about-xerox/environment/enus.html

User Guide 21

Safety and Regulations

Canada

Environmental Choice

WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Certified to Office Machines CCD-035

This product is certified to Environmental Choice® standard for Office Machines, meeting all requirements for reduced environmental impact. As part of achieving certification, Xerox

Corporation has proven this product meets the standard’s criteria for energy efficiency. Certified copier, printer, multifunctional device, and fax products must also meet criteria such as reduced chemical emissions and demonstrate compatibility with recycled supplies. Environmental Choice was established in 1988 to help consumers find products and services with reduced environmental impacts. Environmental Choice is a voluntary, multi-attribute and lifecycle based environmental certification that indicates a product has undergone rigorous scientific testing, exhaustive auditing, or both, to prove its compliance with stringent, third-party, environmental performance standards

Germany

Germany Blue Angel

RAL, the German Institute for Quality Assurance and Labeling, has awarded this product the Blue

Angel Environmental Label, distinguishing it as a machine which satisfies Blue Angel criteria for environmental acceptability in terms of machine design, manufacture, and operation.

Blendschultz

Das Gerät ist nicht für Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld platziert werden.

Lärmemission

Maschinenlärminformations- Verordnung 3. GPSGV: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB9A) oder weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.

Importeur

Xerox GmbHHellersbergstraße 2-441460 Neuss Deutschland

22 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Material Safety Data

For Material Safety Data information regarding your machine see the support information for your area.

North American material safety data can be found here: www.xerox.com/msds.

European Union material safety data can be found here: www.xerox.com/environment_europe.

For the Customer Support Center phone numbers, go to www.xerox.com/office/worldcontacts.

Environment, Health and Safety Contact

Information

For more information on Environment, Health, and Safety in relation to this Xerox device and supplies, please contact the customer help line for your area.

Device safety information is also available on the Xerox website www.xerox.com/about-xerox/ environment.

USA: For Environment, Health, and Safety information call 1-800 ASK-XEROX

Canada: For Environment, Health, and Safety information call 1-800 ASK-XEROX

Europe: For Environment, Health, and Safety information call +44 1707 353 434

User Guide 23


®

5945/5955

24 User Guide

Getting Started

2

Identifying the Parts of Your Device

Your new device is not simply a conventional copier, it is a digital device capable of copying, faxing, printing and scanning, dependent on your model and configuration.

All features and functions described within the User Guide relate to a fully configured WorkCentre and may not be available on your device. If you require further information on any of the optional components, or information on any of the other device configurations please contact your local

Xerox representative.

There are several configurations available which provide either 45 or 55 copies or prints a minute.

All configurations are fully upgradable so as to meet any future requirements you may have. Please contact your local Xerox representative for further information.

1. Document Feeder and Document Glass: Used for scanning single or multiple documents.

The document glass can be used for scanning single, bound, custom size or damaged documents.

2. Control Panel: Touch Screen and Numeric Keypad.

3. Paper Tray 1: This tray is standard on all models. The tray is fully adjustable and can be used for media sizes A5 LEF (5.5 x 8.5” LEF) to A3 (11 x 17”).

4. Paper Tray 2: This tray is standard on all models. The tray is fully adjustable and can be used for media sizes A5 LEF (5.5 x 8.5” LEF) to A3 (11 x 17”).

User Guide 25

Getting Started WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

5. Paper Tray 3: This tray is standard on all models. The tray can be used for media size A4 LEF

(8.5 x 11” LEF).

6. Paper Tray 4: This tray is standard on all models. The tray can be used for media size A4 LEF

(8.5 x 11” LEF).

7. Bypass Tray: Used for non-standard printing media from A6 SEF (2.8 x 4.3" SEF) to A3 (11 x

17").

8. Offset Catch Tray: The optional offset catch tray delivers output collated or uncollated. Each set or stack will be offset from the previous to enable easy separation.

9. Office Finisher: This optional device stacks, collates, staples and offsets your output. Hole punch kits can be installed with this finisher.

10. New Office Finisher Booklet Maker: This optional finisher creates booklets, collates, offsets, stacks and staples your output. Hole punch kits can be installed with this finisher.

11. Convenience Shelf: An optional shelf used for holding documents and the Convenience

Stapler.

12. Convenience Stapler: Optional stapler used to staple sheets if there is no finisher, or to restaple originals after copying.

Note: SEF is Short Edge Feed (where the short edge of the paper is the leading edge when the paper is fed into the device). LEF is Long Edge Feed (where the paper is oriented so that the long edge is fed into the device first).

Locating the Serial Number for Your

Device

If you need assistance during or after product installation, please visit www.xerox.com

for online solutions and support.

If you require further assistance, call our experts at the Xerox Support Center, or contact your local representative. When telephoning please quote the machine serial number.

The Xerox Support Center or local representative telephone number is provided when the device is installed.

1. Lift the handle to open the door on the left side of the device. Gently lower the door until it comes to rest.

2. The serial number is located at the very top of the area exposed when the door opens.

26 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Services and Options

Identifying the WorkCentre 5945 Standard and Optional Services

There are a number of services and options available for use with your device. Many services and options are provided as standard and simply require enabling, or configuring with additional third party hardware.

Additional optional functions and kits are also available and can be purchased and installed.

The options available are dependent on your device model.

Standard

• Paper Tray 1 fully adjustable paper tray.


• Paper Tray 3 high capacity paper tray.


• Bypass Tray used for non-standard printing media.

• Color Scanner used to scan in color.

• Scanning enables E-mail and Workflow Scanning services.

Optional

• Envelope Tray this tray is fitted instead of paper tray 2 to enable envelope printing. Up to 55

#10 Envelope s (4.1"x 9.5") can be loaded in the tray.

• Paper Tray Lock Kit locks the trays so that paper cannot be removed, this is a useful feature in libraries.

• Offset Catch Tray delivers collated or uncollated output when a finisher is not installed.

• Office Finisher stacks, collates, staples and offsets your output. A hole punch kit is also available for this finisher.

• Office Finisher 2 Hole Punch Kit enables the Office Finisher to make 2 hole punches. Other hole punch kits are available for this finisher. Only one hole punch kit can be fitted at one time.



• Office Finisher Swedish 4 Hole Punch Kit enables the Office Finisher to make 4 hole punches.

Other hole punch kits are available for this finisher. Only one hole punch kit can be fitted at one time.

• New Office Finisher Booklet Maker creates booklets, collates, offsets, stacks and staples your output. Hole punch kits can be installed with this finisher.

• New Office Finisher Booklet Maker 2 Hole Punch Kit enables the New Office Finisher

Booklet Maker to make 2 hole punches. Other hole punch kits are available for this finisher. Only one hole punch kit can be fitted at one time.

User Guide 27


®

5945/5955





• New Office Finisher Booklet Maker Swedish 4 Hole Punch Kit enables the New Office

Finisher Booklet Maker to make 4 hole punches. Other hole punch kits are available for this finisher. Only one hole punch kit can be fitted at one time.

• Convenience Stapler for manual stapling. The Convenience Shelf must be installed.

• Convenience Shelf a shelf which can be installed on the left side of the device.

• Basic Fax Kit (Embedded) this kit enables a single fax line connection.

• Extended Fax Kit (Embedded) this kit enables two fax lines to be connected.

• USB Keyboard support enables users to plug in an external keyboard. The keyboard can be useful to enter logins with strong passwords, enter scan metadata, enter email addresses and maintain the device address book.

• LAN Fax enables users to send faxes directly from their PC using the print driver.

Requires the Basic or Extended Fax Kit to be configured and installed.

• Server Fax enables users to send and receive hard copy faxes via a fax server.

Requires a Third Party Fax Server to be configured and installed.

• Internet Fax allows users to send or receive faxes over the internet or intranet.

• Scan to PC Desktop Kit enables you to scan to your computer. Standard and Pro versions are available.

• XPS Enablement Kit enables you to create documents in the XPS (XML Paper Specification) format.

• Security kit provides additional security features, such as image overwrite options.

• McAfee Integrity Control Kit uses McAfee software to detect and prevent modification and execution of files on the device.

• Unicode International Printing Kit enables unicode characters to be printed.

• Wireless Print Kit enables connection to a wireless network.

• Xerox Secure Access provides a card reading device to restrict access to the device.

• Network Accounting enables the tracking of device usage for Print, Copy and Scan jobs from multiple devices over the network. A third party server is needed.

• Xerox Standard Accounting is an accounting tool which tracks the number of Copy, Print,

Workflow Scanning, Server Fax and Fax jobs for each user.

• Xerox Copier Assistant Kit provides easier access to the copying capabilities. This assistive technology is an alternative to the standard touchscreen and helps everyone, especially people who are wheelchair users, blind or visually impaired, to easily program copy jobs and make copies.

• Foreign Interface Device enables the attachment of a third party access and accounting device, such as a card swipe or coin operated unit.

Not Available

• All the potential options for this device are available on this model either as standard or optional features.

28 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Identifying the WorkCentre 5955 Standard and Optional Services

There are a number of services and options available for use with your device. Many services and options are provided as standard and simply require enabling, or configuring with additional third party hardware.

Additional optional functions and kits are also available and can be purchased and installed.

The options available are dependent on your device model.

Standard





• Bypass Tray used for non-standard printing media.

• Color Scanner used to scan in color.

• Scanning enables E-mail and Workflow Scanning services.

Optional

• Envelope Tray this tray is fitted instead of paper tray 2 to enable envelope printing. Up to 55

#10 Envelope s (4.1"x 9.5") can be loaded in the tray.

• Paper Tray Lock Kit locks the trays so that paper cannot be removed, this is a useful feature in libraries.

• Offset Catch Tray delivers collated or uncollated output when a finisher is not installed.

• Office Finisher stacks, collates, staples and offsets your output. A hole punch kit is also available for this finisher.




• Office Finisher Swedish 4 Hole Punch Kit enables the Office Finisher to make 4 hole punches.

Other hole punch kits are available for this finisher. Only one hole punch kit can be fitted at one time.

• New Office Finisher Booklet Maker creates booklets, collates, offsets, stacks and staples your output. Hole punch kits can be installed with this finisher.





User Guide 29


®

5945/5955



• New Office Finisher Booklet Maker Swedish 4 Hole Punch Kit enables the New Office

Finisher Booklet Maker to make 4 hole punches. Other hole punch kits are available for this finisher. Only one hole punch kit can be fitted at one time.

• Convenience Stapler for manual stapling. The Convenience Shelf must be installed.

• Convenience Shelf a shelf which can be installed on the left side of the device.

• Basic Fax Kit (Embedded) this kit enables a single fax line connection.

• Extended Fax Kit (Embedded) this kit enables two fax lines to be connected.

• USB Keyboard support enables users to plug in an external keyboard. The keyboard can be useful to enter logins with strong passwords, enter scan metadata, enter email addresses and maintain the device address book.

• LAN Fax enables users to send faxes directly from their PC using the print driver.

Requires the Basic or Extended Fax Kit to be configured and installed.

• Server Fax enables users to send and receive hard copy faxes via a fax server.

Requires a Third Party Fax Server to be configured and installed.

• Internet Fax allows users to send or receive faxes over the internet or intranet.

• Scan to PC Desktop Kit enables you to scan to your computer. Standard and Pro versions are available.

• XPS Enablement Kit enables you to create documents in the XPS (XML Paper Specification) format.

• Security kit provides additional security features, such as image overwrite options.

• McAfee Integrity Control Kit uses McAfee software to detect and prevent modification and execution of files on the device.

• Unicode International Printing Kit enables unicode characters to be printed.

• Wireless Print Kit enables connection to a wireless network.

• Xerox Secure Access provides a card reading device to restrict access to the device.

• Network Accounting enables the tracking of device usage for Print, Copy and Scan jobs from multiple devices over the network. A third party server is needed.

• Xerox Standard Accounting is an accounting tool which tracks the number of Copy, Print,

Workflow Scanning, Server Fax and Fax jobs for each user.

• Xerox Copier Assistant Kit provides easier access to the copying capabilities. This assistive technology is an alternative to the standard touchscreen and helps everyone, especially people who are wheelchair users, blind or visually impaired, to easily program copy jobs and make copies.

• Foreign Interface Device enables the attachment of a third party access and accounting device, such as a card swipe or coin operated unit.

Not Available

• All the potential options for this device are available on this model either as standard or optional features.

30 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Describing the Finishing Devices

Office Finisher

• Holds up to 250 sheets of paper in the Top Tray, and up to 2000 sheets in the Stacker Tray.

• Paper weight 60 to 216 gsm (16 to 57 lb).

• The Office Finisher can collate, stack, staple and hole punch (if available) your output depending on the features selected. It staples between 2 and 50 sheets of 80 gsm (20 lb) paper, less if using heavyweight paper or tabs.

• The finisher stapler has 1 staple cartridge containing 5000 staples.

• This finisher can be fitted with the optional 2, 3 or 4 Hole-Punch kit.

New Office Finisher Booklet Maker

• Holds up to 250 sheets of paper in the Top Tray, and up to 2000 sheets in the Stacker Tray.


• The finisher can collate, stack, staple and hole punch (if available) your output depending on the features selected. It staples between 2 and 50 sheets of 80 gsm (20 lb) paper, less if using heavyweight paper or tabs.

• The finisher stapler has 1 staple cartridge containing 5000 staples.

• This finisher can be fitted with the optional 2, 3 or 4 Hole-Punch kit.

• The booklet maker can staple and fold up to 15 sheets of 80 gsm (20 lb) paper.

• The booklet maker stapler cartridges each contain 2000 staples.

Identifying the Control Panel Buttons

1. Services Home: Provides access to the services available on the device.

2. Services: Returns the display to the previous Copy, Fax, or Scan feature screen when the Job

Status screen or Machine Status screen is displayed.

3. Job Status: Use to check the progress of active jobs, or display detailed information about completed jobs.

4. Machine Status: Use to check the device status, the billing meters, the status of consumables, or print the user documentation and reports. Use this button also when accessing the Tools mode.

User Guide 31


®

5945/5955

5. Touch Screen: Use to select programing features and display fault clearance procedures and general device information.

6. Log In/Out: Use to enter log in details, and to log out.

7. Help: Displays help messages for device features.

8. Numeric Keypad: Use to enter alphanumeric characters.

9. Dial Pause: Use to insert a pause when dialing a fax number.

10. ‘C’ Cancel Entry: Cancels the previous entry made on the Numeric Keypad.

11. Language: Use to select a different language for the touch screen options.

12. Power: Use to select Energy Saver mode, perform a quick restart or to power on or off the device.

13. Clear All: Press once to clear a current entry. Press twice to return to default settings.

14. Interrupt Printing: Use to pause the job which is currently printing, to run a more urgent copy job.

15. Stop: Stops the job in progress.

16. Start: Use to start a job.

32 User Guide

Getting Started

Power On and Off

Powering the Device On

WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

1. Ensure that your device is connected to a suitable power supply and that the power cord is fully plugged in to the electrical inlet of the device.

less than 3 minutes 50 seconds.

Note: If there are any pages in the document feeder input tray when the device powers on or exits power save mode you will be prompted to reload the documents.

Powering the Device Off

Power Off ends the current session and turns off the device.

Note: Confirming power off will result in the deletion of any jobs currently in the queue. If

Cancel is selected the power off option will be cancelled, the device will be available for use and any jobs currently in the queue will be retained.

The device will begin a controlled power down sequence. It remains on for approximately 36 seconds before switching off.

User Guide 33


®

5945/5955

More Information

Using the Energy Saver Option


Energy Saver ends the current session and keeps the device running on low power. When in Energy

Saver Mode, press the Power button to wake up the device.

Saver state.

Note: When Energy Saver mode is confirmed the device will immediately enter Low Power mode. If Sleep mode has been configured, the device will then enter Sleep mode after a specified period of time.

Note: The Power button is illuminated when the device is in the Energy Saver state. A steady light indicates the device is in Low Power mode. A flashing light indicates the device is in Sleep mode.

4. To re-activate the device when in Low Power or Sleep mode, press the Power button. The device takes longer to recover from Sleep mode.

Note: If there are any pages in the document feeder input tray when the device powers on or exits power save mode you will be prompted to reload the documents.

More Information


34 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Loading Documents

Original documents can be loaded either into the document feeder or onto the document glass.

1. Load your documents face up in the document feeder input tray. Adjust the guide to just touch the documents.

Or

Lift up the document feeder. Place the document face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top left corner. Close the document feeder.

Note: Original documents are only scanned once even when several copies are selected or 2-sided originals are inserted into the document feeder.

User Guide 35

36


®

5945/5955

Making Copies

When you press the Start button to make a copy, the device scans your originals and temporarily stores the images. It then prints the images based on the selections made.

If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter login details to access the Copy features.


Or


5. If required, select the Copy tab. This is usually the active tab when the Copy service opens.

6. Select any options required.

7. Enter the number of prints required using the numeric keypad on the control panel.

9. Remove the original from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed. The job enters the job list ready for processing.

10. Press the Job Status button on the device control panel to view the job list and check the status of the job.

11. If your job remains held in the Active Jobs list, the device needs you to supply additional resources, such as paper or staples before it can complete the job. To find out what resources are needed, select the job and then select the Details button. Once the resources are available the job will print.

More Information

Using a User ID to Log In at the Device

Viewing the Progress and Details of a Job using the Job Status Menu

User Guide


®

5945/5955

Print

Printing a Document using the PostScript Print Driver

You can print to the device from your computer through a print driver. There are a variety of Xerox print drivers available for the device to support all the popular operating systems. The Xerox print drivers allow you to use the specific features available on your device.

Note: The device is enabled for AirPrint. AirPrint is Apple’s driverless printing technology that enables Apple devices, including Macs, phones and tablets, to print to the device without installing drivers or downloading software.

Your System Administrator may have loaded a specific print driver on your computer. However, if the choice of driver is yours, the following information may help you decide which driver to install.

• PS (PostScript) gives you the most options to scale and manipulate images; it offers more precision with high-end graphics. PostScript also provides you with different types of errorhandling and font substitution options.

• PCL (Printer Control Language) generally has fewer advanced features than PostScript. PCL drivers process most jobs faster than other drivers. This driver is suitable for most every-day printing tasks.

• XPS (XML Paper Specification) is an open specification for a page description language and a fixed document format originally developed by Microsoft. Use this driver to improve the speed and quality of XPS files that you print.

• Mac is a PostScript driver that has been specifically designed to work on Macs.

Note: To print an XPS document, your device needs to have the optional XPS feature installed.

In addition to the drivers designed specifically for your device, you can also use the Xerox Global

Print Driver or the Xerox Mobile Express Driver. These drivers will not give you access to all the features available with the device specific drivers.

• Global Print Driver is available for PS or PCL printer description languages, the same as the device-specific drivers mentioned above. This driver works with Xerox and non-Xerox printers.

Using this driver makes it easy to add and update printers as the print driver does not need to be changed.

• Mobile Express Driver lets you find and print to any PostScript printer in any location without driver downloads and installations.

Your System Administrator can configure permissions to control access to the print feature.

• Specifying the time and day of the week when you can print to the device.

• Blocking certain types of job such as secure print.

• Limiting access to specific paper trays.

• Preventing single sided printing.

• Setting specific print settings for applications, for example, setting all Microsoft Word documents to print single sided.

• Limiting print jobs to secure print jobs.

Your System Administrator may also configure your print driver to prompt you to enter login details when you print a document.

User Guide 37


®

5945/5955

Refer to the System Administrator Guide for further information.

1. Open the document to be printed. From most applications select the Office button or select

File, then select Print from the file menu.

2. Enter the number of copies you want to produce. Depending on the application you are using you may also be able to select a page range and make other print selections.

3. Select the Xerox PS driver from the list of print drivers available.

4. Open the print driver Properties window - the method will vary depending on the application you are printing from. From most Microsoft applications select the Properties or Preferences button to open the window.

5. Select the option(s) required.

7. Select the confirmation button, the name will vary depending on the application you are printing from. From most applications select the OK or Print button.

8. Collect your job from the device.

of the job.

10. Print jobs are usually shown in the Active Jobs list, however if your System Administrator has enabled the Hold All Jobs feature, your job will be listed in either the Held Print Jobs or the

Unidentified Print Jobs list. To release a held job select the job in the required list and then select the Release button.


More Information

Using the Job Type Feature with the PostScript Print Driver

Viewing Active Jobs using the Job Status Menu

Releasing a Held Job using the Job Status Menu

Releasing a Secure Print Job using the Job Status Menu

Accessing Your Personal Secure Jobs List using the Job Status Menu

Releasing Jobs Held in a Public Queue using the Job Status Menu

Releasing Jobs Held in a Private Queue using the Job Status Menu

Viewing the Unidentified Held Jobs Queue using the Job Status Menu

System Administrator Guide www.xerox.com/support.

Using Internet Services to find System Administrator Contact Details


Printing a Document using the PCL Print Driver



38 User Guide


®

5945/5955
























3. Select the Xerox PCL driver from the list of print drivers available.



User Guide 39


®

5945/5955




of the job.



More Information

Using the Job Type Feature with the PCL Print Driver











Printing a Document using the Mac Print Driver

You can print to the device from your computer through a print driver. The Xerox Mac print driver allows you to use the specific features available on your device.










40 User Guide


®

5945/5955


1. Open the document to be printed. From most applications select File, then select Print from the file menu.


3. Select the Xerox driver from the list of print drivers available.

depending on the application you are printing from. From most applications select the dropdown menu that states Copies and Pages, or that states the application name.




of the job.




More Information

Using the Job Type Feature with the Mac Print Driver



Printing a Secure Print Job using the Mac Print Driver








User Guide 41


®

5945/5955

Printing a Document using the XPS Print Driver






















42 User Guide


®

5945/5955





3. Select the Xerox XPS driver from the list of print drivers available.





of the job.




More Information

Using the Job Type Feature with the XPS Print Driver










Installing Optional Services using the Tools Menu


User Guide 43

44


®

5945/5955

Fax

Explaining the Fax Options

There are three Fax services which can be installed or enabled on your device, Fax (Embedded Fax),

Internet Fax and Server Fax.

If the Fax (Embedded Fax) service is installed, your device is connected directly to a telephone line and therefore gives you direct control over your fax transmissions. This type of fax travels over normal telephone lines and will therefore be charged at telephone rates.

Using Fax enables you to scan your documents and send them to most types of fax machines that are connected to the telephone network.

Received faxes can be setup to print at the device automatically, held in the job list until a secure passcode is entered or sent to an E-mail address using the Fax Forward feature.

The standard Fax option connects to one telephone line. An Extended Fax option is also available which uses two telephone lines. Using two telephone lines allows you to simultaneously send to two destinations, receive from two destinations, or send and receive.

Internet Fax enables the creation of an electronic image file by scanning an original hard copy document. The scanned image is converted into Email format to transmit over the internet or intranet.

Recipients are selected from an address book or entered manually using the keyboard. Received

Internet Faxes are automatically sent from the server to the device as print jobs.

Server Fax scans your documents and sends them to any type of fax machine that is connected to a telephone network. Your images are sent from your device to a Third Party fax server, which relays them over the telephone network to the fax number of your choice.

This means that your fax transmissions are controlled by the server, which may limit your faxing options. For example, the server may be set-up to collect and send all faxes at off peak times.

The server control may also reduce your costs as the server can select the most appropriate time and telephone network to use to transmit the fax.

Faxing from the Device

Sending a Fax (Embedded Fax)



Use the Fax (Embedded Fax) service to scan your documents and send them to most types of fax machines that are connected to the telephone network.

Note: This option must be made available by your System Administrator.

User Guide


®

5945/5955

If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter login details to access the Fax features.


Or


5. If required, select the Fax tab. This is usually the active tab when the Fax service opens.

keypad to enter the recipient’s fax number.

• If you want to send the document to more than one recipient enter the additional details, one recipient at a time, and select the Add button again until all the recipients have been added.


10. Press the Start button on the control panel to scan the original.

11. Remove the original from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed.


More Information





Using Dialing Characters in a Fax number (Embedded Fax)

Sending an Internet Fax

Internet Fax is similar to the E-mail feature in that it sends documents across the internet or intranet using e-mail addresses. There are several key differences between Internet Fax and the E-mail feature.

• Use Internet Fax if you need tracking evidence to confirm your document has been delivered, this is useful for audit purposes.

• Use Internet Fax if you need to send to and receive from other Internet Fax enabled devices.


User Guide 45


®

5945/5955

If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter login details to access the Internet Fax features.


Or


5. If required, select the Internet Fax tab. This is usually the active tab when the Internet Fax service opens.

7. Use the touch screen keyboard to enter the e-mail address of the recipient.

• The number of alphanumeric characters that can be entered depends on the size of the characters chosen. Once the end of the entry box has been reached no more characters can be added.

• To delete a character use the backspace X button.

• Use the special characters button to access special characters such as $ and %.

• Buttons with an icon in the lower right corner have accented or additional characters available. Select and hold the button to view related characters in a pop-up menu. Select the desired character from the pop-up menu.

• Use the ENG button to access additional language keyboards.


9. If required, select Cc from the To: dropdown menu to copy a recipient on the e-mail. Use the touch screen keyboard to enter the recipient details and then select the Add button.

Note: At least one To address must be selected, documents cannot be sent to a Cc address alone.

10. Select the Close button to save the information you entered.





More Information

Using the Internet Fax Address Book


Sending an E-mail




46 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Sending a Server Fax



Server Fax scans your documents and sends them to any type of fax machine that is connected to a telephone network. Your images are sent from your device to a third party fax server, which relays them over the telephone network to the fax number of your choice.


If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter login details to access the Server Fax features.


Or


5. If required, select the Server Fax tab. This is usually the active tab when the Server Fax service opens.







More Information

Using Dialing Characters in a Fax Number (Server Fax)





User Guide 47


®

5945/5955

Faxing from your Computer

Sending a Fax using the PostScript Print Driver


If Authentication has been enabled on your device you may have to login at the device to see or release your jobs.

If Accounting has been enabled you may have to enter login details at the print driver before you can send your job.

Use the Fax option in your print driver to send a document to a fax address. The job is sent from your computer to the device in the same way as a print job, but instead of being printed it is then faxed over a telephone line to the specified fax destination.

Note: To use this feature, your System Administrator must install and enable the fax option on your device.



2. Enter the number of copies you want to send.

Note: You only need to select 1 copy even if you are sending the fax to more than one address.

Selecting more than 1 copy will print your document more than once on the recipient’s device but will only print the cover sheet once (if you include a cover sheet generated by the print driver).



5. If required, click the Printing Options tab. This is usually the active tab when the print driver opens.

Either

• Click the Add Recipient button to add a new recipient manually.

Select the Name entry box and use your keyboard to enter the name of the recipient.

Select the Fax Number entry box and use your keyboard to enter the recipient’s fax number.

If required, select the Organization entry box and use your keyboard to enter the recipient’s company name.

If required, select the Telephone Number entry box and use your keyboard to enter the recipient’s telephone number.

If required, select the E-mail Address entry box and use your keyboard to enter the recipient’s e-mail address.

If required, select the Mailbox entry box and use your keyboard to enter the recipient’s mailbox number.

If required, select the fax recipient in the list and then select the Save button.

Note: The recipient’s details are saved on your computer’s hard drive, in your personal address book.

48 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Click the OK button.

Or

• Click the Add From Phonebook button to add a recipient stored in the address book.

Select the option required.

Personal Phonebook displays contacts you have added to the phonebook using your print driver.

Shared Phonebook lists contacts you have added, but also contacts added by other people. This address book is usually saved on a network server and must be made available by your System Administrator.

LDAP Phonebook contains contacts listed in your LDAP (Lightweight Directory

Access Protocol) address book. LDAP address books are usually maintained by IT teams as they are often used as company address books and for network authentication and authorization.

Select the contact required from the list.

• If the contact list is long, click in the Search... entry box and use your keyboard to enter the contact details.

• Click the OK button to see the search results.

Select the Add button.


7. If required, select more than one recipient from the Recipients list by clicking the first recipient, pressing and holding the Ctrl button on a PC or the Command button on a Mac and then clicking each additional recipient. Release the Ctrl or Command button once all recipients have been selected.

8. If you want to add a cover sheet to your fax job, click the Cover Sheet tab.

• Select the Information tab. This is usually the active tab when the Cover Sheet options box opens.

If required, select the Sender Name entry box and use your keyboard to enter your name.

If required, select the Sender Organization entry box and use your keyboard to enter your company name.

If required, select the Sender Telephone Number entry box and use your keyboard to enter your telephone number.

If required, select the Sender E-mail Address entry box and use your keyboard to enter your e-mail address.

If required, select the Sender Fax Number entry box and use your keyboard to enter the fax number you would like any replies faxed to.

If required, select a Recipients option.

Show Recipient Names prints the names of all the recipients on the cover sheet.

The names used are the names you entered when adding each recipient’s details.

Hide Recipient Names does not print any recipient name on the cover sheet.

Show Custom Text adds specific text you enter as the recipient detail. This option is useful if you are sending to more than one recipient at the same number, but have saved the number under only one name.

• Select the entry box under the Recipients menu and use your keyboard to enter your custom text.

User Guide 49


®

5945/5955

• If you want to add a watermark to your cover sheet, click the Image tab.

Select the Watermark option required.


Text activates a text entry box where you can type in your text. There are options to select a font, color, orientation and position for your text.

Picture activates the graphic settings. Click the folder icon to browse to your image. There are options to select a scale, the position and the lightness of your graphic.

If required, select a Layering option.

Print in Background prints your cover sheet text over your watermark, so some of the watermark may be covered.

Blend gives equal prominence to your cover sheet text and your watermark.

Print in Foreground prints your cover sheet text under your watermark, so some of the cover sheet text may be covered.

• Click the OK button.

10. If you want the device to print a confirmation sheet, use a specific send speed or resolution, send at a specific time, use a dialing prefix or include credit card details, click the Options tab.

• If required, select Print a Confirmation Sheet from the Confirmation Sheet menu to have the device print a page stating that your job has successfully faxed. Depending on how your System Administrator has configured the device an error sheet may print if the job fails.

• If required, select the starting transmission speed you require from the Send Speed menu.

• If required, select the resolution you require from the Fax Resolution menu. Higher resolutions take longer to transmit.

• If required, select the time the device should send your job using the Send Time options.

• If required, select the Dialing Prefix entry box and use your keyboard to enter a character that should be dialled before the main fax number.

• If required, select the Credit Card entry box and use your keyboard to enter a credit card number.


11. Click the OK button to save your settings.


13. Depending on how your device has been set up, the Fax Confirmation screen may display with the fax recipients for your job. If required, click the OK button to confirm.

More Information





50 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Sending a Fax using the PCL Print Driver














Either











User Guide 51


®

5945/5955

Or


























52 User Guide


®

5945/5955






















More Information





User Guide 53


®

5945/5955

Sending a Fax using the Mac Print Driver












area when the print driver opens.

Either








If required, click the Save to Address Book checkbox.



54 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Or

• Click the Add From Address Book button to add a recipient stored in the address book.





If required, select more than one recipient from the Recipients list by clicking the first recipient, pressing and holding the Ctrl button on a PC or the Command button on a

Mac and then clicking each additional recipient. Release the Ctrl or Command button once all recipients have been selected.



• Click the Cover Sheet Notes button.

Click the Cover Sheet Notes entry box and use your keyboard to enter your note.


• Click the Sender Information button.







• Click the Recipient Information button.








9. If required, select the Cover Sheet Image option required.

• New adds a new image.

• Text adds a text cover page.

• Picture adds an image to the cover page.


10. Select the paper size required from the Cover Sheet Paper Size menu.

User Guide 55


®

5945/5955






• If required, select the Dialing Options entry box and use your keyboard to enter a character that should be dialled before the main fax number.





More Information





Sending a Fax using the XPS Print Driver












56 User Guide


®

5945/5955




Either











Or














User Guide 57


®

5945/5955































58 User Guide


®

5945/5955




More Information





Using Workflow Scanning

Workflow Scanning converts hard copy documents into electronic images and saves them into network filing destinations (repositories).

A Template must be used when a scan is made - the template contains the filing destination address and other scan settings such as the image quality. When making a scan you can edit the scan settings but not the filing destination.


If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter login details to access the Workflow Scanning features.


Or


Note: If your System Administrator has added mandatory fields to the default template you will be asked to complete the required document information as soon as you select the

Workflow Scanning button.

5. If required, select the Workflow Scanning tab. This is usually the active tab when the Workflow

Scanning service opens.

6. Select a template type from the All Templates dropdown menu.

7. If required, ensure the latest templates are available by selecting Update Templates from the

Advanced Settings tab.

8. Select the template required.




User Guide 59


®

5945/5955


More Information

Explaining What Workflow Scanning Does and How It Works


Scanning a Document to your Computer or Network using Single-Touch Scan

Creating a New Template in Internet Services



Assigning Descriptive Data to a Workflow Scanning Job

Sending an E-mail

Use the E-mail feature to scan images and send them to a recipient as an attachment to an e-mail.


If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter login details to access the E-mail features.


Or


5. If required, select the E-mail tab. This is usually the active tab when the E-mail service opens.






Note: If e-mail encryption is enabled, e-mails may only be sent to recipients with a valid encryption certificate. Encryption ensures that the message cannot be read by anybody except the intended recipient. In addition, with e-mail signing enabled, the recipient can be sure that the message has actually come from the person marked as the sender.


60 User Guide


®

5945/5955




11. If required, select the From... button and use the touch screen keyboard to enter or edit the

From address for the e-mail.

Note: Your System Administrator may choose to lock the From button to prevent the preset

From address being altered.

• Select the OK button.

12. If required, select the Subject... button and use the touch screen keyboard to enter or edit the subject title for the e-mail.


13. If required, select the File Name button and use the touch screen keyboard to enter a name for the file created from your scanned document. If you choose not to enter a file name a default name entered by your System Administrator will be used.






More Information




Saved Jobs

Saving Jobs

Saving Jobs using the PostScript Print Driver




Use the Saved Job option to store your job on the device's hard drive so that it can then be printed on demand when required or printed from Internet Services.

User Guide 61


®

5945/5955

Note: Your System Administrator must enable the Job Storage feature on your print driver before you can use the Saved Job option. If you are able to update your own driver settings, this feature can be found by opening the drivers window, right clicking the driver, selecting Printer Properties and then the Configuration tab. Use the dropdown menu to set the Job Storage Module status in the Installable Options section to Installed.








• Select Use Document Name from the Job Name dropdown menu to save your job with the same name as the original document.

8. Select the folder where your job should be saved from the Save To menu.

• If your required folder does not display, you can use your keyboard to enter the name of the folder where your job should be saved. The Default Public Folder is available for all users to save their jobs to.

9. If required, select the Print and Save checkbox to print your document. If you do not check this box your job will be saved, but not printed.

10. If required, select the Private radio button to passcode protect your document.

• Click in the Passcode entry box and use your keyboard to enter a 4 to 10 digit passcode.

Note: To release your job you will enter this passcode using the numeric keypad on the device control panel. Only use numbers, and choose a passcode you will remember but that is not easy for other people to guess.

• Click in the Confirm Passcode entry box and use your keyboard to re-enter your 4 to 10 digit passcode.

11. Click the OK button.




More Information


Printing a Saved Job using the Print From Feature

Printing Saved Jobs from Internet Services

Creating a New Folder for Saved Jobs in Internet Services



62 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Saving Jobs using the PCL Print Driver





















User Guide 63


®

5945/5955





More Information







Saving Jobs using the Mac Print Driver












64 User Guide


®

5945/5955


9. If required, select the Print and Save button. If the Save button is selected your job will be saved, but not printed.

10. If required, select the Private button to passcode protect your document.







More Information







Saving Jobs using the XPS Print Driver







User Guide 65


®

5945/5955




















More Information







66 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Printing Saved Jobs

Printing a Saved Job using the Print From Feature

The Print From feature prints jobs which have been saved on the device or on a USB stick. This is a useful feature if you have documents that you need to print regularly.


If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter login details to access the Print From feature.

Use Print From Saved Jobs to print jobs which have been saved in a folder on the device using the

Saved Jobs feature.

Saved Jobs are documents that are sent to the device and stored there for future use. Saved jobs can be accessed and printed at the device and from Internet Services.

5. Select the folder required.

6. Select the saved job required.


9. Select the Paper Supply option required.

• Automatically Select lets the device select the appropriate paper size for each original based on the size of the original and reduce or enlarge programming.

• Select a paper tray that contains the size and type of paper you require. The size and media loaded in each tray is displayed.

10. Select the OK button.

11. Select the 2-Sided Printing button.

12. Select the 2-Sided Scanning option required.

• 1-Sided use this option if your originals are printed on 1 side.

• 2-Sided use this option if your originals are 2-sided. The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option.

• 2-Sided, Rotate Side 2 use this option if your originals are 2-sided and open up like a calendar. The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option.

13. Select the Finishing button to select a specific finishing option for the output, or select Auto for the device to choose an appropriate option.

14. Press the Start button on the Control Panel to print the job.

15. If the job is a secure job, enter the passcode required and select OK.


More Information


User Guide 67


®

5945/5955





Printing Saved Jobs from Internet Services

Internet Services uses the embedded web server on the device. This allows you to communicate with the device over the internet or intranet through your web browser.

If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter login details to access this feature.



Use the Saved Jobs option as a convenient way to store commonly used documents that you need to print, such as forms. Saved jobs can be stored using your print driver and Internet Services. You can print Saved Jobs from the device Control Panel and Internet Services.

1. At your computer, open your web browser.

2. In the URL field, use your keyboard to enter http:// followed by the IP Address of the device. For example: If the IP Address is 192.168.100.100, enter http://192.168.100.100.

Note: To find out the IP Address of your device, print a configuration report or ask your System

Administrator.

Default Public Folder are listed.

the top of the heading row.

8. If required, click the Copies entry box and use your keyboard to update the number of copies.

The default number is 1 even if multiple copies were requested when the job was originally saved.






68 User Guide

WorkCentre

®

5945/5955 Getting Started

More Information

Saving Jobs using the PostScript Print Driver





Logging in to Internet Services


Printing the Information Pages from the Machine Status Menu

Enhancing Productivity

Your device is a powerful multi-functional device with many digital functions integrated into one sleek system. It is designed to support large workgroups in different office environments. You can do more with less and streamline your workflow with these productivity enhancing features, for example:

• Online address books

• Customization to meet your own work processes

• Powerful documentation features for example, Booklet Creation, Special Pages, Build Job and

Annotations

To maximize job productivity, use the Job Status button to access the Active Jobs list and manage your jobs. If a job is urgent, use the Promote option to prioritize the job.

If a job is held in the list, it may require additional resources or a secure code to print. The reason for the held status is displayed on the Job Progress screen. Once the requirement has been met or the correct secure code entered, the job is released for printing.

To enhance productivity your System Administrator can change the default settings for many of the features to the settings most commonly used in your work group. For example, your System

Administrator could increase the default darkness of copies if you regularly copy lightly marked documents such as pencil drawings.


More Information




User Guide 69


®

5945/5955

Maintenance and Consumables

Identifying the Replaceable Units

There are several consumables on the device that need replenishing or replacing, such as paper, staples, and customer replaceable units.

The device will display a message on the touch screen when any of the units need to be re-ordered.

This message is a warning that the unit is nearing the end of its life. Only replace the unit when a message actually instructs you to do so.

!

WARNING

When replacing consumables do NOT remove the covers or guards that are fastened with screws.

You cannot maintain or service any of the parts that are behind these covers and guards. Do NOT attempt any maintenance procedure that is NOT specifically described in the documentation supplied with your device.

More Information

Replacing the Toner Cartridge

Cleaning the Document Glass and Constant Velocity Transport

Glass

To ensure optimum print quality at all times, regularly clean the glass areas of your device. This helps avoid output with streaks, smears and other marks that may transfer from the glass area when scanning documents.

70 User Guide


®

5945/5955

When you use the document feeder, your documents will pass over the stationary scanners using the Constant Velocity Transport glass and side 2 scanner window. Any dirt or marks on the glass will cause lines or streaks on your copies, faxes or scanned images.

1. Use a lint-free cloth, lightly dampened with Xerox Anti-Static or general cleaning fluid (or another suitable non-abrasive glass cleaner) to clean the document glass and the Constant

Velocity Transport glass (the narrow strip of glass to the left of the main document glass).

2. Wipe away any residue with a clean cloth or paper towel.

3. Use a lint-free cloth, lightly dampened with water, Xerox cleaning fluid or Xerox film remover to clean the under side of the document cover or document feeder and the complete circumference of the Constant Velocity Transport roll.

!

WARNING

When cleaning the device do NOT use organic or strong chemical solvents or aerosol cleaners. Do

NOT pour fluids directly onto any area. Use supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in this documentation. Keep all cleaning materials out of the reach of children.

!

WARNING

Do not use pressurized air-spray cleaning aids on or in this equipment. Some pressurized air-spray containers contain explosive mixtures and are not suitable for use in electrical applications. Use of such cleaners can result in a risk of explosion and fire.

Cleaning the Control Panel, Touch Screen, Document Feeder and

Output Trays

Regular cleaning keeps the touch screen, control panel and other device areas free from dust and dirt.

1. Use a soft, lint-free cloth, lightly dampened with water.

2. Wipe clean the entire area of the control panel, including the touch screen.

3. Wipe clean the document feeder, output trays, paper trays and other outside areas of your device.

4. Remove any residue with a clean cloth or paper towel.

Clearing Paper Jams

When a paper jam occurs, a fault screen is displayed which provides recovery instructions. Follow these instructions to clear the fault.

Any printed sheets removed will automatically be reprinted once the paper jam is cleared.

1. The fault screen will indicate the location of the jam. Use the green handles and knobs indicated in the instructions displayed on the touch screen to remove the jammed paper.

2. Ensure that all jam clearance handles and levers are returned to their correct positions. The red flashes behind the jam clearance handles and levers should not be visible.

User Guide 71


®

5945/5955

Help

Accessing the Help Features On the Device

When using your device, detailed and timely help is available at your fingertips. You can access Help information and tips from a variety of sources.

2. Use the scroll bar to locate the item required, then select the item. Messages, screen instructions and graphics provide additional information.

Accessing the PostScript Print Driver Help Pages




Use the help button to open the Xerox online help. You will need to be connected to the internet to use this help feature.





More Information




72 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Accessing the PCL Print Driver Help Pages









More Information




Accessing the Mac Print Driver Help Pages








User Guide 73


®

5945/5955

More Information




Accessing the XPS Print Driver Help Pages










More Information




74 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Using the Internet Services Help Feature



Use the Internet Services Help link to see instructions and information on how to use the features in Internet Services. Internet Services Help opens in a new window.

Note: Internet Services is primarily a tool for System Administrators. The Help feature is written for

System Administrators rather than general users.





Administrator.


More Information




Getting Further Assistance

For any additional help visit our customer web site at www.xerox.com

or contact the Xerox Support

Center quoting the machine serial number.

The Xerox Support Center will want to know the nature of the problem, the machine serial number, the fault code (if any) plus the name and location of your company.

More Information


User Guide 75


®

5945/5955

76 User Guide

Copy

3

Making Copies




Or








More Information



User Guide 77

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Copy Options

Reduce or Enlarge

Reducing or Enlarging Copies



A variety of options are available on your device to enable you to reduce or enlarge the output from your original. You can input a specific reduction or enlargement ratio, or choose from a selection of pre-defined options.


Or



6. Select the Reduce / Enlarge option required.

• Use the + and - buttons to set the exact reduce / enlarge % (or use the numeric keypad to type in the ratio required).

• 100 % will keep your output image the same size as your original. This option is useful if you are programming a complex job and want to cancel any reduce or enlarge settings without cancelling other settings you have made.

• Auto % lets the device automatically select the best ratio to reduce or enlarge the original by to fit onto the selected paper size.

Note: You must specify a paper tray before using this option.

• More... gives access to options not listed on the main page.





78 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information

Reducing or Enlarging Copies by Proportional %

Reducing or Enlarging Copies by Independent X-Y %



Setting the Paper Supply for Copies

Reducing or Enlarging Copies by Proportional %




Use the Proportional % options to reduce or enlarge the image by the same ratio in both directions so that the image gets bigger or smaller, but the proportions remain the same.


Or



Enlarge options not listed on the main page.

8. Select the option required. You can select more than one option.

• To set a specific ratio, select the 25-400 % entry box and use the numeric keypad or the arrow buttons to enter the ratio required.

• To center the output on the page, check the Auto Center checkbox. To work effectively the output should be smaller than the selected output media.

• To use a pre-defined reduction or enlargement ratio, use the Presets (X-Y%) buttons to select 100%, Auto % or commonly used ratios. Your System Administrator can alter the preset options.

Note: When Auto % is selected, the device chooses the best ratio to reduce or enlarge the original onto the selected paper size.




User Guide 79

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




More Information

Reducing or Enlarging Copies by Independent X-Y %





Reducing or Enlarging Copies by Independent X-Y %




The Independent X-Y% selection enables you to set different reduction or enlargement ratios for the X (width) and the Y (length) of the image. This will produce a distorted copy of your original.


Or





• To set a specific ratio, select the Width X% entry box and the Length Y% entry box and use the numeric keypad or the + or - buttons to enter the width and length ratios required.

• To use a pre-defined reduction or enlargement ratio, use the Presets (X / Y%) buttons to select 100 / 100%, Auto Independent X-Y% or commonly used ratios. The selected X and

Y ratios in percentages are shown next to the button. Your System Administrator can alter the preset options.

80 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

• 100% / 100% will keep your output image the same size as your original. This option is useful if you are programming a complex job and want to cancel any reduce or enlarge settings without cancelling other settings you have made.

• Auto Independent X-Y% automatically fits the image of your original onto the paper you have selected. The reduction or enlargement may not be proportional, the device will distort the image so that it will fit onto the paper.

Note: If you have not yet selected a paper size you will be prompted to select a size when you select the Auto Independant X-Y% option.







More Information

Reducing or Enlarging Copies by Proportional %








Use the Paper Supply options to select a specific paper tray for your job, or to allow the device to

Auto Select a tray.

Auto Select automatically selects the appropriate paper size for each original based on the size of the original and any reduce or enlarge programming you have chosen. Alternatively, you can select a paper tray that contains the size and type of paper you require.

User Guide 81

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

If the Auto Selection feature has been enabled by your System Administrator and the same size, color and type of media is loaded in more than one tray, the device will automatically switch from the active tray to another if the media in the active tray runs out. If you have an administrator login you will be able to activate the Auto Selection feature.


Or






7. If the paper source you have chosen is not listed on the main screen, select More... to see the additional options.

• Select the required tray from the list. The chosen tray is highlighted in blue.






More Information



82 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Making 2 Sided Copies or Copying 2 Sided Originals



The device provides options to make one or two-sided copies from one or two-sided originals using either the document feeder or the document glass.

Note: If using the document glass to scan two-sided originals, the device displays a message when ready to scan side 2.


Or



6. Select the 2-Sided Copying option required.

• 1 > 1-sided use this option if your originals are printed on 1 side and you want single-sided copies.

• 1 > 2-sided use this option if your originals are printed on 1 side and you want 2-sided copies. You can also select the Rotate Side 2 button to have the second page rotated by

180°.

• 2 > 2-sided use this option if you want to make 2-sided copies from 2-sided originals. You can also select the Rotate Side 2 button to have the second side rotated by 180°.

• 2 > 1-sided this option will make 1-sided copies from 2-sided originals.





More Information



User Guide 83

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Copy Output

Choosing an Output Option for Copies



Depending on the optional finishing device and kits installed you will have the choice of different output options such as stapling, folding and collating.

Use the No Finishing option if no finishing is required for the output.

Use the collation options to sort your copies into sets (1,2,3 1,2,3 1,2,3) or stacks (1,1,1 2,2,2

3,3,3).

Use the stapling options to staple your document. The options available are dependent on the finishing device installed. The basic stapling options are Off, 1 Staple and 2 Staples.

Use the Hole Punched / Stapled option if you want your output to be hole punched or hole punched and stapled. Each sheet will be punched individually so there is no limit to the number of pages you can have in a set. Hole punching can only be selected for A4 LEF (8.5 x 11" LEF) and A3 (11 x 17”) paper.

Note: The Collation options must be set before selecting the Hole Punched / Stapled options.


Use the Booklet options to automatically produce folded and stapled booklets. A cover can be inserted onto the booklet automatically.

Use the Booklet Creation option to automatically reduce and arrange the images in the correct sequence on your selected media, so that a booklet is created when the copy set is folded in half.


Or



6. If required, select the More... button at the bottom of the Copy Output section to access all the finishing options. The number of options displayed will depend upon the finishing device and kits installed (there may not be enough to require a More... button).

7. Select the Copy Output option required.

• None

84 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

• Collation

• Stapled

• Hole Punched / Stapled

• Booklet

• Tri-Folded






More Information

Using the None Output Option for Copies

Collating Copies

Stapling Copies

Hole Punching Copies

Preparing Copies to be made into a Booklet



Describing the Finishing Devices

Using the None Output Option for Copies






Or



User Guide 85

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






More Information

Collating Copies

Stapling Copies





Collating Copies





3,3,3).


Or




86 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

7. Select the Collation option required.

• Collated sorts your copies into sets 1,2,3 1,2,3 1,2,3.

• Uncollated sorts your copies into stacks 1,1,1 2,2,2 3,3,3.





More Information


Stapling Copies





Stapling Copies




Use the stapling options to staple your document. The options available are dependent on the finishing device installed. The basic stapling options are Off, 1 Staple, 2 Staples and Multi-Staple.


Or




User Guide 87

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


• If required, select the Off button to cancel any programming you have entered.

• 1 Staple positions a single staple the top left corner of your document.

• 2 Staples positions 2 staples along the trail edge of your document.

Note: For some staple selections the device will rotate the image. If you are unable to staple, ensure that Image Rotation is set to Auto Rotate in Tools. Your System Administrator sets the

Image Rotation options when the device is installed.






More Information


Collating Copies






Hole Punching Copies




Use the Hole Punched / Stapled option if you want your output to be hole punched or hole punched and stapled. Each sheet will be punched individually so there is no limit to the number of pages you can have in a set. Hole punching can only be selected for A4 LEF (8.5 x 11" LEF) and A3 (11 x 17”) paper.

Note: The Collation options must be set before selecting the Hole Punched / Stapled options.

88 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or







9. Select the Hole Punch/Stapled option required.


• Select the On button to Hole Punch your sets and stacks on the left edge.







More Information


Collating Copies

Stapling Copies




User Guide 89

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Preparing Copies to be made into a Booklet





Use the Booklet Creation option to automatically reduce and arrange the images in the correct sequence on your selected media, so that a booklet is created when the copy set is folded in half.


Or




7. Select the Booklet Creation option required.

• Off select this option if you want your output layout to match your originals. For example, if your originals are already in a booklet layout.

• On select this option if you want the device to automatically reduce and arrange the images to create a booklet layout.

8. Select the Finishing option required.

• Folded & Stapled will staple and fold the output along the center margin to produce stapled booklets.

• Fold Only will fold the output along the center margin to produce loose leaf booklets.

• None select this option if you do not want the device to fold and staple your output.





90 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


The following Booklet Maker specifications apply.

• Paper Sizes A3 (11x17”), A4 (8.5x11”), 8.5x13” and 8.5x14”.


• All media must be Short Edge Feed (SEF).

Booklet thickness specifications.

• For Folded and Stapled booklets a maximum of 15 sheets of 80 gsm (20 lb) or equivalent thickness. For example you can have 13 sheets of 80 gsm (20 lb) and a cover sheet of 160 gsm

(43 lb).

• For Folded Only booklets a maximum of 5 sheets of 80 gsm (20 lb) or equivalent thickness. For example you can have 3 sheets of 80 gsm (20 lb) and a cover sheet of 200 gsm (53 lb).


More Information

Making Copies into a Booklet


Collating Copies

Stapling Copies




User Guide 91

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Image Quality

Setting the Original Type for Copies



Use the Original Type options to enhance the quality of your output based on the type of original images and how they were produced. For example, if you use a text setting for the original type your device will produce output with sharper edges than if you selected a photo setting - this will make text documents easier to read, but will reduce the quality of photo images where there are lightness and darkness gradations not found in text.


Or


7. Select the Content Type required.

• Photo and Text produces high quality pictures but slightly reduces the sharpness of text and line art. This setting is recommended for originals containing high quality photographs or line art and text.

• Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art.

• Photo gives the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art. It is the best option for originals containing photos or continuous tones without any text or line art.

• Map is used if your original is a map.

• Newspaper / Magazine is used if your original is from a magazine or newspaper that contains photographs or text.

8. Select the How Original was Produced option required.

• Printed produces the best results for newspaper, magazine, map and other professionally printed originals.

• Photocopied is used for most photocopied and laser printed originals.

• Photograph is recommended for originals containing high quality photographs on photographic paper.

• Inkjet is used specifically for originals produced on inkjet printers.

• Solid Ink is recommended for originals produced on solid ink devices.



92 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




More Information



Image Options

Choosing the Image Options for Copies



The Image Options features give you choices for changing the appearance of the output.

Use the Lighten / Darken options to manually adjust the lightness or darkness of the image. Light originals containing pencil images may produce better output if the darkness is increased. Dark originals such as halftones or documents with colored backgrounds may need to be lightened.

Use the Sharpness option to manually control the sharpness of the scanned images.


Or






User Guide 93

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



More Information

Changing the Sharpness of Copies



Lightening or Darkening Copies

Lightening or Darkening Copies





Or


7. Select the Lighten / Darken option required.

• Move the indicator down to darken the scanned image. If this creates an output with too dark a background, use the Background Suppression feature to remove the background.

• Move the indicator up to lighten the scanned image.





94 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information

Changing the Sharpness of Copies


Setting the Background Suppression for Copies


Avoiding Poor Quality Output

Changing the Sharpness of Copies





Or


7. Select the Sharpness option required.

• Move the indicator up to sharpen the scanned image. Text images are more likely to be improved by sharpening than photo images.

• Move the indicator down to soften the scanned image. This is particularly useful when scanning photos.






User Guide 95

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information




Image Enhancement

Choosing an Image Enhancement Option for Copies



The Image Enhancement options improve the quality of your output by reducing the background or adjusting the contrast.

Use the Background Suppression option to enhance originals that have colored backgrounds, by reducing or eliminating the background on the output. This option is useful when your original is on colored paper.

Use the Contrast option to control the image density on the output and compensate for an original that has too much or too little contrast on the image.


Or








96 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information


Setting the Copy Contrast



Setting the Background Suppression for Copies





Or


unwanted background.

• If required, select Off to turn the Background Suppression feature off. The Off option is particularly useful when the Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals, the original has a gray or colored border, such as a certificate, or you want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals.






More Information




User Guide 97

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Setting the Copy Contrast





Or


contrast settings automatically, or select the Manual Contrast button to control the settings yourself.

• Move the Manual Contrast indicator towards More to produce more vivid blacks and whites for sharper text and lines but less detail in pictures.

• Move the Manual Contrast indicator towards Less to produce more detail in light and dark areas of the original.






More Information




98 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Layout Adjustment

Setting the Original Orientation for Copies



Use the Original Orientation option to specify the layout of the originals being scanned, whether the image on the page is in portrait, landscape, upright or rotated orientation in relation to the page itself. The orientation of the images on the originals must match the orientation selected. The device uses this information to identify if the images require rotating to produce the required output.


Or


7. Select the Original Orientation option required.

• Portrait Originals the images on the originals are in a LEF orientation.

• Landscape Originals the images on the originals are in a SEF orientation.

• Upright Images the images on the originals are loaded in a upright orientation in the

Document Feeder.

• Sideways Images the images on the originals are loaded in a sideways orientation in the

Document Feeder.

Note: If you are using the Document Glass, the orientation is as seen before turning the original over.






User Guide 99

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information



Specifying the Size of the Original to be Copied



Use the Original Size options to select automatic size detection of the originals, specify the sizes of mixed size originals, or specify the exact size of an image to be scanned.


Or


7. Select the Original Size option required.

• Auto Detect enables automatic size sensing, this is the default setting. The size detected is matched to a standard paper size.

• Preset Scan Area defines the size of your original from a list of preset, standard original sizes. You can view the list by using the scroll bar.

• Custom Scan Area sets a specific area for scanning and is useful for scanning receipts.

Measure the width (X) and height (Y) of the original to be scanned and enter the X and Y measurements into the fields provided.

• Mixed Size Originals scans documents containing different sized pages. The pages must be the same width, such as A4 (8.5 x 11”) LEF and A3 (11 x 17”) SEF, other combinations are shown on the device touchscreen. The device detects the size of the documents and will produce different output depending on the combinations selected.

Note: If Auto Reduce / Enlarge and a specific Paper Supply is selected, all the images are reduced or enlarged to fit the specified paper size. If Auto Paper supply is selected a mixture of paper sizes will be output.





100 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



More Information



Copying Book Pages



Use the Book options to specify which page or pages of a book, or other bound original, are to be scanned.

The device will identify the size of the original during scanning. If the pages have a black or dark colored border the device will assume that the pages are smaller than they really are. To overcome this, use the Custom Scan Areas feature in the Original Size settings to enter the exact size of the page.

Use the Job Assembly - Build Job feature to create finished sets from several pages of your bound document.

Note: Do not close the document feeder when scanning bound originals (closing the feeder may damage the book, the document feeder, or both).

1. Place your book in the top left corner of the document glass.

6. If the book, when opened, is not a standard paper size, manually input the correct size using the Original Size feature.

• Select the Original Size button.

• Select the Original Size option required.

Auto Detect enables automatic size sensing, this is the default setting. The size detected is matched to a standard paper size.

Preset Scan Area defines the size of your original from a list of preset, standard original sizes. You can view the list by using the scroll bar.

Custom Scan Area sets a specific area for scanning and is useful for scanning receipts.

Measure the width (X) and height (Y) of the original to be scanned and enter the X and

Y measurements into the fields provided.

User Guide 101

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Mixed Size Originals scans documents containing different sized pages. The pages must be the same width, such as A4 (8.5 x 11”) LEF and A3 (11 x 17”) SEF, other combinations are shown on the device touchscreen. The device detects the size of the documents and will produce different output depending on the combinations selected.



8. Select the Book Copying option required to delete an area from the center of the book image to avoid unwanted marks being reproduced from the gutter of the book.

• Off applies no binding edge erase to the output.

• Both Pages scans both pages, the left page of the book will be scanned first. Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 50mm (0 to 2”) to be deleted from the center of the book image.

• Left Page Only scans the left page only. Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from

0 to 25mm (0 to 1”) to be deleted from the right side of the page image.

• Right Page Only scans the right page only. Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 25mm (0 to 1”) to be deleted from the left side of the page image.






More Information

Building a Copy Job with Multiple Page or Segment Settings




Using the Image Shift Feature to Reposition the Copy Image



102 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Use the Image Shift option to move the position of the image on the output page. This is useful when the output needs to be bound as it allows you to move the image to the left or right to leave enough room for the binding.


Or


7. Select the Image Shift option required.

• Off removes any previous Image Shift settings. This option is useful if you are programming a complex job and want to cancel any image shift settings without cancelling other settings you have made.

• Margin Shift moves the image up / down or left / right on the page to give larger or smaller margins. Use the arrow buttons to enter the shift required. The amount of shift is in 1mm

(0.1”) increments up to 50mm (2.0”). When copying 2-sided there are two options.

• Adjust the margin of side two independently of side one.

• Check the Mirror Side 1 checkbox if you want the side 2 shift to mirror the shift set for side

1.

• Auto Center automatically centers the scanned image on the output paper. To work effectively, the original should be smaller than the selected output media or alternatively, the image should be reduced.

• Use the Presets menu to select a commonly used Image Shift. Your System Administrator can alter the preset options. Once you have selected a preset option, you can edit it using the arrow buttons. The amount of shift is in 1mm (0.1”) increments up to 50mm (2.0”).

When copying 2-sided there are two options.

• Adjust the margin of side two independently of side one.

• Check the Mirror Side 1 checkbox if you want the side 2 shift to mirror the shift set for side 1.






More Information




User Guide 103

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Erasing Edges from Copies



Use the Edge Erase options to specify the scan area so that only a specific section of your document is scanned. This is useful if you want to remove the marks caused by punched holes or staples in your original.


Or


7. Select the Edge Erase option required.

• All Edges erases an equal amount from all the edges. Use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount to be erased from 3 mm (0.1”) to 50 mm (2.0”) or select the entry field and use the numeric keypad to enter the amount required.

• Individual Edges enables a different amount to be erased from each of the edges, on both the first and second sides. Use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount to be erased from 3mm (0.1”) to 50mm (2.0”) or select the appropriate entry field and use the numeric keypad to enter the amount required.

Select the Side 1 button.

Select the Top, Right, Bottom and Left entry boxes as required and use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount to be erased from 3mm (0.1”) to 50mm (2.0”) or use the numeric keypad to enter the amount required.

Either



Or

Check the Mirror Side 1 entry checkbox to reverse the side 1 settings on side 2.

Depending on the page orientation the left and right or top and bottom settings will be reversed.

• Select an option from the Presets list to apply commonly used Edge Erase settings such as

Hole Punch Erase and Header / Footer Erase. Your System Administrator can alter the preset options. Once a preset edge erase setting has been selected it can be edited.



104 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Either



Or

Check the Mirror Side 1 entry checkbox to reverse the side 1 settings on side 2.

Depending on the page orientation the left and right or top and bottom settings will be reversed.






More Information




Creating Copies with an Inverted Image



Use the Invert Image options to create a mirror image or a negative image. This feature is useful for originals that have a substantial amount of dark background or light text and images.


Or


7. Select the Mirror Image option required.

User Guide 105

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

• Normal Image produces output that matches the original.

• Mirror Image reverses the original image creating a mirror of the original.

8. Select the Negative Image option required.

• Positive Image produces output that matches the original.

• Negative Image converts the dark image areas in the original to light, and the light areas to dark.






More Information



Output Format

Making Copies into a Booklet



Use the Booklet Creation options to produce booklets from 1 or 2 sided originals. The device will scan your originals and automatically reduce and arrange the images in the correct sequence on your selected copy paper, so that a booklet is created when the copy set is folded in half. A cover can be inserted onto the booklet automatically.

If your device is fitted with a Booklet Maker you can use the Booklet Creation feature to automatically produce folded and stapled booklets.


Or


106 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

8. Select the required Original Input option.

• 1-Sided Originals

• 2-Sided Originals

9. Set the Paper Supply required for the job. If stapling and / or folding is required a Short Edge

Feed (SEF) paper supply must be selected.


10. Select the Reading Order required for the finished output, either Left to Right or Right to Left.


11. If a Booklet Maker is installed, select the finishing option required.

• Fold and Staple will staple and fold the output along the center margin to produce booklets.

• Fold Only will fold the output along the center margin to produce booklets.







More Information




Adding Covers to Copies

Special Pages

Choosing a Special Pages Option for Copies



The Special Pages options are used to give a more professional appearance to your document, for example by adding covers or pages printed on different paper.

User Guide 107

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Use the Covers option to add blank or printed pages to the front, back or front and back of your set.

This option is also used to add a cover to a booklet. The covers can be a different media to the rest of your job.

Use the Chapter Starts option to ensure that a chapter begins on the right or left side of the page, with a blank page automatically inserted if needed.

Use the Inserts option to add blank pages on a different media into your document, or to specify pages to be printed on a different media. Up to two sources of media can be used for the inserts. If inserting blank pages, a blank sheet must be inserted in the appropriate place in your original document.

Use the Exceptions feature to use a different paper source for a range of pages. For example, you could print the self test pages in a training guide on different colored paper.


Or



Note: This feature is not available until a specific paper tray has been selected. It is not available if the paper Auto Select option is active.

6. Set the Paper Supply required for the main body of the job.

9. Select the Special Pages option required.

• Covers adds blank or printed pages to your output.

• Chapter Starts ensures a chapter begins on the right or left side of the page.

• Inserts adds blank pages on a different media into your document.

• Exceptions sets a different paper source for a range of pages.







More Information

Adding Covers to Copies

108 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Adding Chapter Start Sections to Copies

Adding Inserts into Copy Sets

Selecting Exceptions within Copy Sets



Adding Covers to Copies






Or





7. Load the media to be used for the covers into another paper tray, ensuring that it is in the same size and orientation as the paper you are using for the main body of your job.

8. If required, update the Paper Settings screen and select the Confirm button to approve your selections.

10. Select the Special Pages button.

11. Select the Covers... button.

12. Select the Covers Option required. Covers can be blank or contain images.

• Off cancels any programming you have entered.

• Front & Back Same adds a blank or printed cover to the front and back of the document.

The printing and paper supply options are identical for both covers.

• Front & Back Different adds a blank or printed cover to the front and back of the document. The printing and paper supply options can be programmed individually for each cover.

• Front Only adds a blank or printed cover to the front of the document.

• Back Only adds a blank or printed cover to the back of the document.

13. Select the Printing Option required for the covers.

User Guide 109

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

• Blank Cover provides a blank sheet as the cover.

• Print on Side 1 prints an image on side 1 of the cover.

• Print on Side 2 prints an image on side 2 of the cover. Select Rotate Side 2 to rotate the image on the second side.

• Print on Both Sides prints an image on both sides of the cover. Select Rotate Side 2 to rotate the image on the second side.

14. Select the Paper Supply required for the selected covers. If required, select the More... button to access options not listed on the main page.








More Information




Loading Different Types of Media

Loading Tray 1 and Changing the Tray Settings


Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4

Loading the Bypass Tray and Changing the Tray Settings

Adding Chapter Start Sections to Copies



Use the Chapter Starts option to ensure that a chapter begins on the right or left side of the page, with a blank page automatically inserted if needed.


Or


110 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




10. Select the Page Number entry box and use the numeric keypad to enter the page number of the original where you want a chapter to start.

11. Select the required option from the Start Chapter section.

• On Right Page starts the new chapter on a right page.

• On Left Page starts the new chapter on a left page.

12. Select the Add button.

13. Repeat the previous three steps as required until all the chapters have been programmed.








More Information



Adding Inserts into Copy Sets



User Guide 111

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or





7. Load the media to be used for the inserts into another paper tray, ensuring that it is in the same size and orientation as the paper you are using for the main body of your job.

8. If required, update the Paper Settings screen and select the Confirm button to approve your selections.

10. Select the Special Pages button.

11. Select the Inserts... button.

12. Select the After Page Number entry box and use the numeric keypad to enter the page number of the insert.

Note: The page numbers are the physical page numbers and not the page numbers which may be printed on the document. For 2-sided documents, each page of your document has 2 page numbers, so you need to count each side of your document.

13. Use the arrow buttons or select the Insert Quantity entry box and use the numeric keypad to enter the number of pages to be inserted.

14. Select the Paper Supply required for the insert.

• If a tab insert is required, ensure the correct tab sequence and number of tabs are loaded for the job. If printing on the tabs, use the Tab Shift option to enter the amount of shift required to ensure the tab image prints correctly on the tab.


16. Repeat the previous four steps until all the inserts required have been programmed.







112 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information







Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4



Selecting Exceptions within Copy Sets





Or





9. Select each Page Number box in turn and use the numeric keypad to enter the initial and final page numbers in the exception range.

10. If required, select the paper tray required for the exception. Different paper trays can be selected for each exception range.


12. Repeat the previous three steps until all the exceptions have been programmed.


User Guide 113

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955







More Information



Annotations

Choosing Copy Annotation Options



The Annotations feature enables you to automatically add a comment, page number, today’s date or a Bates Stamp to your copy output. You can select any or all of these annotation options and specify where on the copy output they should appear. You can also select the appearance of the annotations such as the font size.

Annotations will not be applied to Covers (Front or Back), Tabs, Inserts and Blank Chapter Start

Pages.

Use the Page Numbers option to automatically print a page number in a specified position on the page. Page numbers are automatically increased by one. For 2 sided copy output the page number is printed on both sides and counts as two pages.

Use the Comment feature to add up to 50 alphanumeric characters in a specified position on the page. An existing comment can be amended, or a new comment can be created.

Use the Date annotation to add the current date to your chosen position on the page. The date printed is the date set on your device, your System Administrator sets the calendar when the device is installed.

Use the Bates Stamp option to add a selected Bates Stamp in a specified position on the page.

Bates Stamping is used primarily in the legal and business fields and consists of a set prefix (such as a case number or client reference) together with a page number applied to a document as it is being processed. The prefix can contain up to 8 alphanumeric characters. You can add a new prefix or choose an existing one from the list provided.

114 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Use the Format and Style options to specify the orientation, style and printing requirements for the selected annotations.

Note: The Format and Style options are not available until at least one annotation has been programmed.


Or


7. Select the Annotations option(s) required. More than one option can be selected, but a different location must be selected for each option.

• Page Numbers automatically prints a page number on the page.

• Comment adds comments of up to 50 alphanumeric characters to the page.

• Date adds the current date to the page.

• Bates Stamp adds a selected Bates Stamp to the page.






More Information

Adding Page Numbers to Copies

Adding Comments to Copies

Printing a Date on Copies

Printing a Bates Stamp on Copies



Adding Page Numbers to Copies



User Guide 115

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Use the Page Numbers option to automatically print a page number in a specified position on the page. Page numbers are automatically increased by one. For 2 sided copy output the page number is printed on both sides and counts as two pages.


Or


• If required, select the Off button to produce output without page numbers.

page number you want printed on your first copy output sheet.

10. Select an arrow button to determine the position of the page numbers on the output sheets.

11. Select the Apply To option required.

• All Pages adds the annotation to all pages.

• All Pages Except First adds the annotation to all pages except the first page.


After an annotation has been programmed the Format and Style button becomes visible.

13. Select the Format and Style button.

14. Select the Text Background option required.

• Opaque creates solid annotations placed on top of the copy output with no image visible under the annotated text.

• Transparent creates semi-transparent annotations with the copy image visible under the annotated text.

15. Select the Font Point Size entry box and use the numeric keypad or the + or - buttons to enter a font point size.

16. Select the Side 2 Option required.

• Same as Side 1 applies the same settings to both Side 1 and Side 2 of your output.

• Mirror Side 1 Flip on Horizontal output will open from right to left like a book, with the binding edge on the left. The position of the annotation on Side 2 will mirror Side 1 across the binding edge. For example, if a page number is positioned in the bottom left corner of

Side 1, it will appear in the bottom right corner of Side 2.

• Mirror Side 1 Flip on Vertical output will open from bottom to top like a calendar, with the binding edge at the top. The position of the annotation on Side 2 will mirror Side 1 across the binding edge. For example, if a page number is positioned in the bottom left corner of Side 1, it will appear in the top left corner of Side 2.



116 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






More Information



Adding Comments to Copies



Use the Comment feature to add up to 50 alphanumeric characters in a specified position on the page. An existing comment can be amended, or a new comment can be created.


Or


• If required, select the Off button to produce output without a comment.

9. Select the comment you require from the Stored Comments list. To edit an existing comment, highlight the comment in the list and select the Edit button. Use the keyboard to edit the entry, then select OK to close the keyboard.

10. Select an arrow button to determine the position of the comment on the output sheets.

11. Select the required option from the Apply To dropdown menu.



• First Page Only adds the annotation to the first page but not to any subsequent pages.

User Guide 117

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




















More Information



118 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Printing a Date on Copies



Use the Date annotation to add the current date to your chosen position on the page. The date printed is the date set on your device, your System Administrator sets the calendar when the device is installed.



Or


• If required, select the Off button to produce output without a date.

9. Select the format you require.

• DD/MM/YYYY

• MM/DD/YYYY

• YYYY/MM/DD

10. Select an arrow button to determine the position of the date on the output sheets.

11. Select the required option from the Apply To dropdown menu.



• First Page Only adds the annotation to the first page but not to any subsequent pages.








User Guide 119

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955













More Information





Printing a Bates Stamp on Copies



Use the Bates Stamp option to add a selected Bates Stamp in a specified position on the page.

Bates Stamping is used primarily in the legal and business fields and consists of a set prefix (such as a case number or client reference) together with a page number applied to a document as it is being processed. The prefix can contain up to 8 alphanumeric characters. You can add a new prefix or choose an existing one from the list provided.


Or


120 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

• If required, select the Off button to produce output without a Bates Stamp.

9. Select the Bates Stamp you require from the Stored Prefixes list, if a prefix hasn’t been programmed yet it will be listed as Available. To edit an existing prefix, highlight the prefix in the list and select the Edit button. Use the keyboard to edit the entry, then select OK to close the keyboard.

10. Select an arrow button to determine the position of the Bates Stamp on the output sheets.

11. Select the Starting Page Number entry box and use the numeric keypad to enter a starting page number. Leading zeros may be entered to set the starting page number length, for example 000000001.

12. Select the Apply To option required.





















User Guide 121

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information



Using Transparency Separators within Copy Sets



Use Transparency Separators to interleave each printed transparency with a blank or printed sheet of paper from a specified paper tray.

Note: The size and orientation of the separators must be the same as the transparency sheets.


Or





• If required, select the Off button to remove transparency separators from your job.

10. Select the paper tray containing the paper for the separators from the Separator Supply list. If necessary, select More... to access all the paper tray options.

11. If required, change the paper tray containing the transparencies from the Transparency Supply list. If necessary, select More... to access all the paper tray options.





122 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



More Information





Copying Multiple Pages or Repeat Images onto a Page

Use the Page Layout feature when creating handouts, storyboards or archive documents. Your device will reduce or enlarge the images as needed, to display them either in landscape or portrait orientation on one page, based on the paper supply selected.

Up to 36 images can be fitted onto 1 sheet of paper. The page layout feature can produce several output formats.

• 4 originals using 2 rows and 2 columns.

• 6 originals using 3 rows and 2 columns.

• 2 originals using 2 rows and 1 column.

Note: Some features cannot be used with the Page Layout feature and will be grayed out on the touch screen.


Or


7. Select the Page Layout option required.

• Off to produce a single image per page.

• Pages per Side places a defined number of pages on one or both sides of the paper.

• Repeat Image places a defined number of the same image on one or both sides of the paper.

8. Select the number of pages or repeat times from the preset list or select Specify Rows and

Columns and use the arrow buttons to set a specific number of rows and columns to create a custom layout.

User Guide 123

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


• Portrait Originals if the images on the originals are in a portrait orientation.

• Landscape Originals if the images on the originals are in a landscape orientation.







More Information



124 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Job Assembly




Use the Build Job option to build a job that requires different settings for each page, or for groups of pages (segments) of your document.

Build Job can also be used to assemble individual pages scanned using the document glass into a single job.

1. Split the originals into sections for individual programming.


Or



• Display summary window between segments shows the status of your job after each section has been scanned.

• Turn Build Job Off after job is submitted turns the feature off automatically after the final segment has been scanned.



12. Select the features required for the first segment of the job.

• If using Build Job for a job with tabs, ensure the tabs are loaded correctly and select the tray containing the tabs.

Note: If tab media is selected, the image will be shifted 13mm (0.5”) to the right automatically if the tab original is A4 or 8.5x11” size.

13. Load your first segment originals face up in the document feeder input tray. Adjust the guide to just touch the documents.

Or

Lift up the document feeder. Place the first segment face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top left corner. Close the document feeder.

User Guide 125

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


15. Remove the first segment originals after they have been scanned. The Build Job screen displays the first segment in the list.

16. If required, select the options for the segment.

• Sample Last Segment produces a proof print of the last segment scanned. If you are satisfied with the proof you can continue programming the Build Job.

• Delete Last Segment deletes the last segment scanned. You can continue programming the Build Job.

• Delete All Segments deletes the current Build Job and returns you to the main Build Job screen.

17. Select the features required for the second segment.

18. Load the second segment originals.


20. Repeat these steps until all segments of your job have been programmed and scanned.


22. After the last segment has been scanned, select the Submit Job button.



More Information

Printing a Sample of Build Job Copy Set



Printing a Sample of Build Job Copy Set



When copying a large number of sets, use the Sample Job feature to review a proof copy to ensure that all the print settings are correct before printing the remaining sets.


Or


126 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




One copy set of the job, the Sample Job, is printed. The rest of the job is held in the Job List.

11. Release or delete the Sample Job.

• If the Sample Job is acceptable, select Release. The programmed number of sets will be produced.

• If the Sample Job is unacceptable, select Delete and then select Delete to confirm the deletion. Your job will be deleted from the job list. Repeat the sample job process until you are satisfied with your sample.

12. Select the Job Status button to access your job. The job has the status Held: Sample Made.

13. Select the job in the list.

14. If the Sample Job is acceptable, select Release. The programmed number of sets will be produced.

15. If the Sample Job is unacceptable, select Delete and then select Delete to confirm the deletion. Your job will be deleted from the list.

16. Repeat the Sample Job process until you are satisfied with your sample.




More Information

Retrieving Saved Settings for Copying



Saving Current Settings for Copying

User Guide 127

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




Use the Save Current Settings option to save up to 50 combinations of commonly used feature selections in the device memory. The device stores only the programming of the job, not the image.

Each time Saved Settings are retrieved and used, the image must be scanned.

This feature is useful if you often use the same settings to produce documents.


Or


5. Program the required job features.


9. Select an available setting from the settings name dropdown menu.

10. Use the keyboard to enter a name for your settings.


The settings are stored and can be accessed using the Retrieve Saved Settings feature.

If required, you can continue to print your current job.





More Information




128 User Guide

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




Use the Retrieve Saved Settings option to re-use settings from a previous job. The Save Current

Settings option is used to save the settings into the device memory and then you can apply them to any job.

Once some settings have been retrieved they can be changed, but the changes will not be stored with the saved settings.


Or


7. Select the desired setting from the Setting Name list.

9. If required, you can modify the settings. These changes are not saved with the saved settings.





More Information




User Guide 129

Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Deleting Saved Settings for Copying



Use the Delete Settings option to delete saved settings from the device memory. Only 10 sets of settings can be saved, so you may occasionally need to delete old sets.

5. Select the desired setting from the Setting Name list.

More Information



130 User Guide

Fax

4

Fax (Embedded Fax)

Sending a Fax (Embedded Fax)







Or









More Information






User Guide 131

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Fax

Using Dialing Characters in a Fax number (Embedded Fax)




Use the Dialing Characters options to add special characters such as Dial Pause, Pulse to Tone, Mask

Data, or Wait for Dial Tone characters into fax numbers. More than one dialing character can be inserted into a fax number.


Or



7. Use the touchscreen number pad to enter the recipient’s fax number plus the additional dialing characters.

• Dial Pause [,] adds a delay between numbers. The pause allows time to switch from an inside to an outside line during automatic dialing. For additional pause time, add multiple pauses. If you are using charge code numbers, enter a pause after the fax number but before the charge code number.

• Pulse to Tone [:] switches between pulse and tone dialing.

• Mask Data [/] protects confidential information by changing each character displayed into a *. This is useful if a special charge code or credit card number is required for a call.

Select the Mask Data [/] button before entering confidential numbers and again when you have finished to turn off the masking.

• Space ( ) - characters are used to make the numbers entered easier to read but they are ignored by the device during dialling.

• Wait for Dial Tone [=] suspends dialing until an expected network tone is detected. It can also be used to detect a specific tone when accessing an outside line or other service.




132 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



More Information

Sending a Fax to a Number Saved as a Favorite (Embedded Fax)

Sending a Fax using the Address Book (Embedded Fax)





Sending a Fax to a Number Saved as a Favorite (Embedded Fax)




Use the Favorites option to quickly access regularly used fax numbers. The Favorites are saved in the

Address Book.


Or



7. Select the recipient(s).





More Information




Saving an Address Book Number as a Favorite (Embedded Fax)

User Guide 133

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




Saving an Address Book Number as a Favorite (Embedded Fax)




Use the Favorites option to quickly access regularly used fax numbers. The Favorites are saved in the

Address Book.


address book your System Administrator has installed or set as the default address book, for example the button may be labelled Device Address Book or Network Address Book.

6. Select the Fax Contacts option required.

• Fax Contacts lists individual fax contacts.

• Fax Groups lists groups of fax numbers.

• Fax Favorites lists only the fax contacts or fax groups marked as favorites.

• All Contacts lists all fax contacts and is the best option if you are uncertain which group your contact belongs to.

7. If required, select the Search... button and use the keyboard to enter the recipient or group name. If you don’t know the full name enter the partial name, then select the Search button.

8. Select the recipient required.

10. Select the star icon on the right of a field to add that contact detail to the favorites.


12. Select the Close button.

More Information





Creating a New Fax Address Book Contact (Embedded Fax)



134 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Address Book

Sending a Fax using the Address Book (Embedded Fax)




Use the Address Book option to access frequently used numbers or groups of fax numbers that have been saved into the address book.

Up to 200 individual entries and 40 group entries can be stored. For each number stored, transmission settings can also be set.


Or




7. Select the Fax Contacts option required.

• Fax Contacts lists individual fax contacts.

• Fax Groups lists groups of fax numbers.

• Fax Favorites lists only the fax contacts or fax groups marked as favorites.

• All Contacts lists all fax contacts and is the best option if you are uncertain which group your contact belongs to.

8. If required, select the Search... button and use the keyboard to enter the recipient or group name. If you don’t know the full name enter the partial name, then select the Search button.

9. Select the recipient required and select Add to Recipients from the menu.

Continue adding recipients as required.

10. To clear an entry from the list, select the entry and then select Remove Recipient from the menu. At the confirmation screen select the Remove button to approve the deletion.





User Guide 135

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information






Creating a Fax Address using Internet Services



Address Book

Creating a New Fax Address Book Contact (Embedded Fax)




Create New Contact will allow you to add a contact to the Address Book, the contact will be stored and is accessible from the Address Book.




9. Select the empty field you want to edit.

10. Use the touch screen keyboard to enter the details.


12. Select the fields you want to edit and use the touch screen keyboard to enter the details.

• Field next to Email icon will allow you to enter an E-Mail address.

• Field next to Phone icon with green background will allow you to enter an Fax number.

• Field next to Phone icon with earth background will allow you to enter an Internet Fax address.


14. Select the star icon on the right of a field to add that contact detail to the favorites.


136 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information

Adding To an Existing Fax Address Book Contact (Embedded Fax)









Adding To an Existing Fax Address Book Contact (Embedded Fax)




Add To Existing Contact will allow you to add the contact details to an existing contact, the new contact detail will be stored and is accessible from the Address Book.




6. Use the number pad or keypad to enter the recipient’s fax number.

9. Select the recipient you want to add the new contact details into.


More Information










User Guide 137

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Faxing 2-Sided Originals (Embedded Fax)




Use the 2-Sided Scanning options to scan both sides of your document. The second side can be rotated.


Or












More Information





138 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Setting the Original Type for Faxes (Embedded Fax)




Use the Original Type options to define the type of original being scanned. Making the correct selection enhances the quality of your output image.


Or





9. Select the Original Type option required.




Note: The Text option requires less transmission time.




More Information

Faxing 2-Sided Originals (Embedded Fax)





User Guide 139

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Specifying the Fax Resolution (Embedded Fax)




Use the Resolution options to balance the quality of the image against the transmission time if the image is to be sent across a network. A higher resolution produces a better quality image, but a slow transmission time. A lower resolution reduces the image quality but decreases the communication time.


Or





9. Select the Resolution option required.

• Standard (200x100 dpi) requires the minimum communication time but does not produce the best image quality for graphics and photos. This is the recommended resolution for text documents.

• Fine (200 dpi) produces average quality text and low quality photos and graphics. This resolution is recommended for average quality text documents and line art.

• Super Fine (600 dpi) produces the best image quality and is recommended for photos and halftones, or images that have tray tones.




More Information

Setting the Original Type for Faxes (Embedded Fax)





140 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Adding a Fax Cover Sheet (Embedded Fax)




Use the Cover Sheet option to add an introduction page to the beginning of your fax. You can add a short comment to the cover sheet, as well as To and From details.


Or





10. Select the On button to add a cover sheet to your transmission.

• If required, select the Off button to cancel any programming you have entered and send your fax without a cover sheet.

11. Select the To entry box and use the keyboard to enter the recipient’s name.

12. Select the From entry box and use the keyboard to enter the sender’s name.

13. Select the comment required from the Comment list.

• If required, select the Edit button and use the keyboard to edit the comment.

• If required select the Off button to cancel any programming you have entered.





More Information


User Guide 141

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




Image Quality

Image Options

Choosing the Image Options for Faxes (Embedded Fax)








Or





10. Select the Image Options button.




142 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



More Information

Lightening or Darkening Faxes (Embedded Fax)

Changing the Sharpness of Faxes (Embedded Fax)



Specifying the Fax Resolution (Embedded Fax)



Lightening or Darkening Faxes (Embedded Fax)






Or






User Guide 143

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








More Information

Changing the Sharpness of Faxes (Embedded Fax)

Choosing the Image Options for Faxes (Embedded Fax)





Changing the Sharpness of Faxes (Embedded Fax)






Or






144 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








More Information


Choosing the Image Options for Faxes (Embedded Fax)





Image Enhancement

Choosing an Image Enhancement Option for Faxes (Embedded Fax)








Or



User Guide 145

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955 keypad to enter the recipient’s fax number.


10. Select the Image Enhancement button.






More Information

Adding or Removing the Background Suppression for Faxes (Embedded Fax)

Setting the Fax Contrast (Embedded Fax)





Adding or Removing the Background Suppression for Faxes (Embedded Fax)






Or



146 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955 keypad to enter the recipient’s fax number.



11. Select Auto Suppression from the Background Suppression menu to automatically suppress unwanted background.






More Information

Choosing an Image Enhancement Option for Faxes (Embedded Fax)

Setting the Fax Contrast (Embedded Fax)






Setting the Fax Contrast (Embedded Fax)






Or


User Guide 147

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





11. Select the Auto Contrast button from the Contrast menu to let the device determine the contrast settings automatically, or select the Manual Contrast button to control the settings yourself.







More Information

Choosing an Image Enhancement Option for Faxes (Embedded Fax)

Adding or Removing the Background Suppression for Faxes (Embedded Fax)





Layout Adjustment

Specifying the Size of the Original to be Faxed (Embedded Fax)




148 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or





10. Select the Original Size button.







Note: If you are unfamiliar with the paper sizes in the receiving machine, resize your document to a standard paper size. Most machines in the US and Canada print 8.5 x 11" pages as standard; most machines elsewhere print A4 pages as standard.





More Information

Faxing Book Pages (Embedded Fax)

Setting a Fax to Reduce Size or Split when Received (Embedded Fax)



User Guide 149

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Setting a Fax to Reduce Size or Split when Received (Embedded Fax)




Use the Reduce / Split option to specify how your faxed document is printed on the receiving fax machine.


Or





10. Select the Reduce / Split button.

11. Select the option required.

• Reduce to Fit shrinks the image to fit the paper size of the receiving fax machine.

• Split Across Pages divides large pages in the original across several pages in the output.




More Information

Specifying the Size of the Original to be Faxed (Embedded Fax)

Faxing Book Pages (Embedded Fax)



150 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Faxing Book Pages (Embedded Fax)




Use the Book options to specify which page or pages of a book, or other bound original, are to be scanned.

The device will identify the size of the original during scanning. If the pages have a black or dark colored border the device will assume that the pages are smaller than they really are. To overcome this, use the Custom Scan Areas feature in the Original Size settings to enter the exact size of the page.

Use the Job Assembly - Build Job feature to create finished sets from several pages of your bound document.

1. Place your book in the top left corner of the document glass.




10. Select the Book Faxing button.

11. Select the Book Copying option required to delete an area from the center of the book image to avoid unwanted marks being reproduced from the gutter of the book.

• Off applies no binding edge erase to the output.

• Both Pages scans both pages, the left page of the book will be scanned first. Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 50mm (0 to 2”) to be deleted from the center of the book image.

• Left Page Only scans the left page only. Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from

0 to 25mm (0 to 1”) to be deleted from the right side of the page image.

• Right Page Only scans the right page only. Use the arrow buttons to specify an amount from 0 to 25mm (0 to 1”) to be deleted from the left side of the page image.


User Guide 151

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



More Information





Setting the Original Type for Faxes (Embedded Fax)



Building a Fax Job with Multiple Page or Segment Settings (Embedded Fax)

Fax Options

Printing a Fax Confirmation Report (Embedded Fax)




Use the Confirmation Report option to print a status report showing whether a fax job has succeeded or failed.


Or





10. Select the Confirmation Report button.

152 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


• Print Confirmation prints a transmission report containing details about the fax, together with a reduced copy of the first faxed page. A confirmation report is printed after every transmission. When sending a fax to multiple recipients, one report is printed listing all the recipients.

• Print On Error Only only prints a report if an error occurs.






More Information





Setting the Fax Starting Rate (Embedded Fax)




Use the Starting Rate option to select the top transmission speed of your fax job. The actual transmission speed will depend on the receiving fax machine.


Or





User Guide 153

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

10. Select the Starting Rate button.


• Super G3 (33.6 Kbps) initially transmits at 33,600 Bits Per Second (bps) and uses Error

Correction Mode (ECM) to minimize transmission errors. This is the fastest fax transmission rate and the default option.

• G3 (14.4 Kbps) initially transmits at 14,400 Bits Per Second (bps), which is the standard

Group 3 digital fax transmission rate. This is used in fax environments where there is existing noise or stress on the phone network which prevents higher speed fax transmissions. Error Correction Mode (ECM) is used to minimize transmission errors.

• Forced (4800 bps) transmits at a rate suitable for areas with low quality communication.

This includes areas experiencing telephone noise, or when fax connections are susceptible to errors.






More Information





Using a Timer to Send a Fax (Embedded Fax)




Use the Delay Send option to store a fax in the device memory and have the device send it at a time you specify. Jobs can be sent from 15 minutes to 24 hours after the time they are programmed. This feature is useful if you want to send your fax to take advantage of off-peak phone rates, or if you are sending to a different time zone.


Or


154 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




10. Select the Delay Send button.



12. Use the arrow buttons to specify a time to send your fax.

• If your device uses a 12 hour clock, select either the AM or PM button.






More Information





Send Header Text




Send Header Text is used to add a header text information when sending the fax. This is an addition to the standard header text. The information is printed in the header at the top of each page of the fax transmission. The information included is displayed on the screen and can be customized using

Tools. Refer to the System Administrator Guide for more information.

User Guide 155

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


Or


• If required, select the Off button to cancel any header text programming you have entered.



More Information





Mailboxes

Sending a Fax to a Remote Mailbox (Embedded Fax)




Mailboxes are areas of device memory where incoming faxes are stored or from which outgoing faxes can be polled (retrieved). Mailboxes enable you to store all received fax documents until it is convenient to retrieve them, or store fax documents in a mailbox for polling.

Mailboxes are set up by your System Administrator, at least one mailbox must be set up before this feature can be used. Up to 200 mailboxes can be set up. To receive faxes in your mailbox you must give the sender your mailbox number. To retrieve a fax from your mailbox you must know your mailbox number - you can also set a passcode for your mailbox.

Use a mailbox passcode to ensure fax documents are secure and can only be accessed by authorised users. The passcode is a 4 digit number.

156 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Note: If the mailbox has been set up with a passcode of 0000 then any combination of numbers, including no numbers, can be entered as the passcode to gain access to the mailbox.

Note: Polling is where a fax is not sent to a recipient but is saved on the originating device. When the recipient is ready to receive the fax they contact (poll) the device and request the fax.

Use the Send to Remote Mailbox option to send a fax directly to an individual’s private mailbox on a remote machine. The remote machine must have mailbox capabilities.


Or




11. Select the Mailbox Number entry field and enter the mailbox number, between 001 and 200.




More Information

Storing a Fax in a Local Mailbox (Embedded Fax)

Printing Faxes Stored in the Local Mailbox (Embedded Fax)

Deleting Faxes Stored in the Local Mailbox (Embedded Fax)





Storing a Fax in a Local Mailbox (Embedded Fax)




User Guide 157

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






Use the Store to a Local Mailbox option to save a document on your device, ready to be polled. The document is stored in your mailbox and automatically sent to a remote fax machine when requested.


Or


9. If required, select the Mailbox Passcode entry field and enter the 4 digit mailbox passcode.





More Information

Sending a Fax to a Remote Mailbox (Embedded Fax)







158 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Printing Faxes Stored in the Local Mailbox (Embedded Fax)









Use the Print Local Mailbox Documents option to print the faxes stored in your mailbox.


9. To print all the documents in the chosen mailbox, select Print All Documents from the menu.

A confirmation screen is displayed, select Print All.


More Information








User Guide 159

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Deleting Faxes Stored in the Local Mailbox (Embedded Fax)









Use the Delete Local Mailbox Documents option to erase the faxes stored in your mailbox.


10. To clear all the documents in the chosen mailbox, select Delete All Documents from the menu.

A confirmation screen is displayed, select Delete All.


More Information








160 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Local Polling

Distributing Documents using Non-Secure Fax Polling (Embedded Fax)




Use the Non-Secure Polling option to store non-confidential documents on the device. The documents can then be retrieved by anyone with your fax number and Poll Remote Fax capabilities.



Or




More Information





Using Secure Fax Polling (Embedded Fax)

Deleting Non-Secure Fax Polling Documents (Embedded Fax)



User Guide 161

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


Use the Delete All Stored Documents option to delete all the documents stored on the device for polling.


memory.

7. At the confirmation screen select the Delete All button.

More Information





Printing Non-Secure Fax Polling Documents (Embedded Fax)




Use the Non-Secure Polling option to store non-confidential documents on the device. The documents can then be retrieved by anyone with your fax number and Poll Remote Fax capabilities.


162 memory.

User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information





Using Secure Fax Polling (Embedded Fax)




Use the Secure Polling option to store confidential documents on the device for polling. Only devices whose fax number you have specified will be able to retrieve the fax.



Or



Continue adding fax numbers as required.




More Information





Printing Non-Secure Fax Polling Documents (Embedded Fax)

User Guide 163

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Remote Polling

Polling a Remote Fax Machine (Embedded Fax)




Use the Poll a Remote Fax option to call a remote fax machine and retrieve a fax. Remote Polling allows you to poll a remote machine immediately or at a specified time. More than one remote machine can be polled at a time.

Use the Delay Poll option to program a specified time to poll the remote machine.



10. If required, select the Delay Poll option to retrieve any faxes at a later time, for example if you want to retrieve documents from another time zone.

• Select the Delay Poll button.

• Use the arrow buttons to specify a time to send your fax.




13. Select the Poll Now button to start polling.

More Information

Polling a Remote Fax Mailbox (Embedded Fax)



Using Secure Fax Polling (Embedded Fax)



164 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Polling a Remote Fax Mailbox (Embedded Fax)




Use the Poll Remote Mailbox option to retrieve a fax from a specific mailbox on another device. You need to know the mailbox number before you can use this option. Sometimes you will also need to know a passcode to access the remote mailbox.



10. Select the Mailbox Number entry field and enter the mailbox number, between 001 and 200.


12. Select the Poll Now button to start polling.

More Information

Polling a Remote Fax Machine (Embedded Fax)





User Guide 165

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Building a Fax Job with Multiple Page or Segment Settings

(Embedded Fax)










10. Select the Build Job button.

11. Select the On button to turn the Build Job feature on and enable the Build Job options.


12. Select the Options... button and choose the options required.









166 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Or







20. Select the Program Next Segment button.







More Information





User Guide 167

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Server Fax

Sending a Server Fax







Or









More Information






168 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Sending a Server Fax using the Workflow Scanning Feature




If you regularly send faxes to the same number and use the same settings every time you may find it easier to use the Workflow Scanning feature to send your fax rather than the Server Fax feature.

If you use the Workflow Scanning feature you will need to set up a template containing the instructions for sending the fax and select the Workflow Scanning service rather than the Server Fax service. The Workflow Scanning feature will then use the Server Fax feature to send your fax.


More Information



Using Machine Stored Templates in Workflow Scanning




Server Fax

Using Dialing Characters in a Fax Number (Server Fax)




Use the Dialing Characters options to add special characters such as Dial Pause, Pulse to Tone, Mask

Data, or Wait for Dial Tone characters into fax numbers. More than one dialing character can be inserted into a fax number.


Or


User Guide 169

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




• Long Pause [|] use to enter a long pause between number.



• Group Dial [\] use to add another fax number to the entry if the fax is being transmitted to multiple recipients.


• Password Check [S] use for remote terminal identification. This character verifies that the correct number has been dialled.

• Wait for Network Tone [W] suspends dialing until an expected network tone is detected.

It can also be used to detect a specific tone when accessing an outside line or other service.

• Readability Character [+] this character is used for readability purposes and does not affect the number entered.





More Information

Sending a Fax Using the Fax Directory (Server Fax)

Adding a Number to the Fax Directory (Server Fax)





170 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Fax Directory

Sending a Fax Using the Fax Directory (Server Fax)




Use the Fax Directory to store individual fax numbers which are used frequently. Up to 30 entries can be added.


Or



7. Select the recipient required and select Add to Recipients from the menu.


• To edit an entry, select it in the list and select Edit... from the menu.

Edit the entry as required and select OK.

• To clear an entry from the list, select the entry and then select Remove Recipient from the menu. At the confirmation screen select the Remove button to approve the deletion.





More Information


Adding a Number to the Fax Directory (Server Fax)





User Guide 171

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Adding a Number to the Fax Directory (Server Fax)


Note: . This option must be made available by your System Administrator.


Use the Fax Directory to store individual fax numbers which are used frequently. Up to 30 entries can be added.


6. Select an empty block from the Fax Number list. If necessary, use the scroll bar.



• Long Pause [|] use to enter a long pause between number.



• Group Dial [\] use to add another fax number to the entry if the fax is being transmitted to multiple recipients.


• Password Check [S] use for remote terminal identification. This character verifies that the correct number has been dialled.

• Wait for Network Tone [W] suspends dialing until an expected network tone is detected.

It can also be used to detect a specific tone when accessing an outside line or other service.

• Readability Character [+] this character is used for readability purposes and does not affect the number entered.

• To edit an entry, select it in the list and select Edit... from the menu.

Edit the entry as required and select OK.


More Information


Sending a Fax Using the Fax Directory (Server Fax)





172 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Faxing 2-Sided Originals (Server Fax)






Or












More Information





User Guide 173

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Setting the Original Type for Faxes (Server Fax)






Or









Note: . The Text option requires less transmission time.




More Information





174 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Specifying the Fax Resolution (Server Fax)






Or






• Standard (200x100 dpi) requires the minimum communication time but does not produce the best image quality for graphics and photos. This is the recommended resolution for text documents.

• Fine (200 dpi) produces average quality text and low quality photos and graphics. This resolution is recommended for average quality text documents and line art.




More Information





User Guide 175

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Image Quality

Choosing the Image Options for Server Faxes






Or













176 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information

Choosing the Image Enhancement Options for Server Faxes


Adding or Removing the Background Suppression for Server Faxes





Choosing the Image Enhancement Options for Server Faxes








Or






User Guide 177

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






More Information


Setting the Server Fax Contrast

Choosing the Image Options for Server Faxes





Adding or Removing the Background Suppression for Server Faxes







Or




178 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955









More Information

Setting the Server Fax Contrast







Setting the Server Fax Contrast







Or


User Guide 179

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955












More Information








Layout Adjustment

Setting the Original Orientation for Server Faxes




180 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or









Document Feeder.


Document Feeder.






More Information

Specifying the Size of the Original to be Faxed (Server Fax)





User Guide 181

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Specifying the Size of the Original to be Faxed (Server Fax)






Or















182 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information

Setting the Original Orientation for Server Faxes





Using a Timer to Send a Server Fax




Use the Delay Send option to store a fax in the device memory and have the device send it at a time you specify. Jobs can be sent from 15 minutes to 24 hours after the time they are programmed. This feature is useful if you want to send your fax to take advantage of off-peak phone rates, or if you are sending to a different time zone.

Note: The fax server may be programmed to send faxes only within a specified time period. If Delay

Send is used to select a transmission time outside the time specified in on the server your fax will be sent during the next transmission slot after the Delay Send time has passed.


Or







User Guide 183

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


12. Use the arrow buttons to specify a time to send your fax.







More Information





Building a Server Fax Job with Multiple Page or Segment Settings











184 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955












Or





20. Delete All Segments deletes the current Build Job and returns you to the main Build Job screen.









More Information





User Guide 185

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Internet Fax

Sending an Internet Fax







Or














186 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




More Information

Using the Internet Fax Address Book


Sending an E-mail




Internet Fax

Using the Internet Fax Address Book






Use the Address Book option to access previously created addresses.


Or




7. Select the Address Book type from the dropdown menu to the left of the Enter name entry box.

• If required, select the Search button to search the device address book. Use the touchscreen keyboard to enter the recipient details. If you don’t know the full address enter the partial address, then select the Search button.

User Guide 187

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

8. Select the required recipient and select To or CC from the menu.


Note: At least one To address must be selected, documents cannot be sent to a CC address alone.






More Information



Sending an E-mail


Creating an Internet Fax Address using Internet Services



Adding a Subject to an Internet Fax






Use the Subject option to add a subject heading to the e-mail.


Or


188 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


7. Use the touchscreen keyboard to enter the e-mail address of the recipient.










11. Select the Subject... button.

12. Use the touchscreen keyboard to enter the subject text.

• Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered.









More Information


Sending an E-mail




User Guide 189

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Setting the Output Color for an Internet Fax






Use the Output Color option to control whether the device replicates the original colors on your document or changes the output, for example by scanning color originals but converting them into black and white output.


Or



7. Use the touchscreen keyboard to enter the e-mail address of the recipient.










190 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

11. Select the Output Color option required.

• Auto Detect allows the device to select the most appropriate color setting.

• Black and White produces black and white output even if the originals were color.

• Grayscale produces output using various shades of gray.

• Color produces full color output.




More Information


Sending an E-mail




Using Internet Fax to send 2-Sided Originals








Or



User Guide 191

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


















More Information


Sending an E-mail




Setting the Original Type for Internet Faxes





192 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




Or




















User Guide 193

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

12. For Print and Text originals, select the How Original was Produced option required.









More Information


Sending an E-mail




Advanced Settings

Image Options

Choosing the Image Options for Internet Faxes








194 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or













11. Select the Advanced Settings tab.







More Information

Lightening or Darkening Internet Faxes

Changing the Sharpness of Internet Faxes

Setting the Saturation for Internet Faxes


User Guide 195

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Sending an E-mail




Lightening or Darkening Internet Faxes









Or









196 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955














More Information

Choosing the Image Options for Internet Faxes




Sending an E-mail

Adding or Removing the Background Suppression for Internet Faxes




Changing the Sharpness of Internet Faxes







User Guide 197

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or






















198 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information





Sending an E-mail




Setting the Saturation for Internet Faxes






Use the Saturation option to manually control the brightness of the color in the scanned images.

Note: If you select black and white output rather than color output the saturation option will not be available.


Or









User Guide 199

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






12. Select the Saturation option required.

• Move the indicator up to increase color in the scanned image.

• Move the indicator down to reduce color in the scanned image.




More Information




Setting the Output Color for an Internet Fax


Sending an E-mail





Choosing an Image Enhancement Option for Internet Faxes







200 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




Or




















User Guide 201

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information


Setting the Internet Fax Contrast


Sending an E-mail




Adding or Removing the Background Suppression for Internet Faxes









Or








202 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955














More Information

Choosing an Image Enhancement Option for Internet Faxes

Setting the Internet Fax Contrast


Sending an E-mail





Setting the Internet Fax Contrast






User Guide 203

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




Or




















204 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



More Information

Choosing an Image Enhancement Option for Internet Faxes



Sending an E-mail




Specifying the Internet Fax Resolution








Or







User Guide 205

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








12. Select the Resolution button.


• 72 dpi produces the smallest file size and is recommended for output displayed on a computer.

• 100 dpi delivers low image quality and is recommended for low quality text documents.

This setting should ideally be used for output displayed on a computer rather than printed.

• 150 dpi produce average quality text and low image quality for photos and graphics, this resolution is recommended for average quality text documents and line art.

• 200 dpi produces average quality text and low quality photos and graphics. This resolution is recommended for average quality text documents and line art.

• 200 x 100 dpi produces average quality and is recommended for standard office documents and photographs.

• 300 dpi produces higher quality output. This setting is recommended for high quality text documents that are to pass through OCR (Optical Character Recognition) applications. It is also recommended for high quality line art or medium quality photos and graphics. This is the best default resolution choice in most cases.

• 400 dpi produces average image quality for photos and graphics and is recommended for photos and graphics.

• 600 dpi produces the largest image file size, but delivers the best image quality. This setting is recommended for high quality photos and graphics.





More Information


Sending an E-mail


Setting the Quality or File Size for Internet Faxes



206 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Setting the Quality or File Size for Internet Faxes






Use the Quality / File Size options to choose between scan image quality and file size. You can select the highest quality, the smallest files or adjust the settings to balance quality against file size.

• A small file size delivers slightly reduced image quality but is better when sharing the file over a network.

• A larger file size delivers improved image quality but requires more time when transmitting over the network.


Or











User Guide 207

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




12. Select the Quality / File Size button.

13. Select the Quality / File Size option required.

• Move the indicator towards Normal Quality / Small File Size for a smaller file and lower quality image. This produces small files by using advanced compression techniques. Image quality is acceptable but some quality degradation and character substitution errors may occur with some originals.

• Move the indicator towards the middle of the scale to produce better image quality and larger files, but not the highest quality or largest files.

• Move the indicator towards Highest Quality / Largest File Size to produce the largest files with the maximum image quality. Large files are not ideal for sharing and transmitting over a network.





More Information


Sending an E-mail


Specifying the Internet Fax Resolution

Layout Adjustment

Setting the Original Orientation for Internet Faxes






208 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or













11. Select the Layout Adjustment tab.

12. Select the Original Orientation button.





Document Feeder.


Document Feeder.

User Guide 209

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955







More Information

Specifying the Size of the Original to be sent by Internet Fax


Sending an E-mail




Specifying the Size of the Original to be sent by Internet Fax








Or



210 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955























More Information

Setting the Original Orientation for Internet Faxes


Sending an E-mail




User Guide 211

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Internet Fax Options

Adding a Message to an Internet Fax






Use the Message option to add a brief message to the file that will be sent.


Or













212 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

11. Select the Internet Fax Options tab.

12. Select the Message button.

13. Use the touchscreen keyboard to enter the text required.










More Information


Sending an E-mail




Adding a Reply To Address to an Internet Fax






Use the Reply To option to include an e-mail address you want the recipient to reply to. This option is useful if you want the recipient to reply to your e-mail address rather than to the device.

User Guide 213

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or














12. Select the Reply To button.

13. Use the touchscreen keyboard to enter the address required.








214 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



More Information


Sending an E-mail




Printing an Internet Fax Acknowledgment Report






Use the Acknowledgment Report option to print a confirmation report, indicating the delivery status of the internet fax. This is useful for audit purposes as, unlike e-mail, there is proof of delivery.


Or








User Guide 215

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955







12. Select the Acknowledgment Report button.

13. Select the Print Report button to print an Acknowledgement Report.

• If required, select the Off button to prevent an Acknowledgement Report being printed.





More Information


Sending an E-mail




Building an Internet Fax Job with Multiple Page or Segment

Settings







216 User Guide

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955














11. Select the Job Assembly tab.












User Guide 217

Fax WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


Or














More Information


Sending an E-mail




218 User Guide

Scan

5

Workflow Scanning


The standard Workflow Scanning option enables the electronic images to be stored and retrieved from a server or workstation on the network. Two further options are available:

• Scan to Mailbox will store the image on the device hard disk and the user can retrieve the file using Internet Services.

• Scan to Home allows the user to send the files to a location on the network specified as their

Home destination.

Workflow Scanning is set up by a System Administrator using Internet Services. Users can use

Internet Services to create templates and folders once the relevant scanning function has been set up and enabled.

Use Scan to Mailbox to scan hard copy originals and store them in a folder on the device. You can retrieve your stored documents at the device using the Print From feature, or at your computer using Internet Services. Scan to Mailbox provides you with a scanning method that is very easy to set up and use.

You can store your documents in the Default Public Folder or create a private folder. If you create a private folder, you must enter a name and password to access the folder. All users can create private folders. Your System Administrator can choose to set up the Scan to Mailbox option so that you have to enter a password to access a folder.

The Default Public Folder and any private folders which have been set up are displayed on the device in the Workflow Scanning templates list, and in the Print From feature.

To store images in a folder, select the template required and scan your images.

Repositories

Repositories are directories or filing locations setup on a server, where your scanned files are saved to and held.

The Repositories are set up using Internet Services. Before you can use Workflow Scanning, your

System Administrator must set up the repositories available to your device.

Selecting a template identifies the repository / location your scanned job is filed to.

Repositories are validated by Internet Services when defined by the System Administrator as a scanning destination. Up to 5 Repositories (1 default and 4 additional) can be defined. After the

Repositories are setup, they are available to you as choices when modifying templates.

User Guide 219

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Templates

Use the Templates feature when you want to scan or fax jobs using the Workflow Scanning service on your device. Templates contain information to tell the device where to file a scanned document.

They also contain settings, such as image quality and file format. Templates help you scan images more quickly because the template contains all the pre-programmed settings for your scan. If necessary, you can change the settings at the device.

All the templates available are displayed on the device in the Workflow Scanning template list.

More Information








Or














220 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information



Scanning a Document to your Computer or Network using Single-Touch Scan





Workflow Scanning

Setting the Output Color for a Workflow Scan







Or













User Guide 221

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






More Information






Using Workflow Scanning to send 2-Sided Originals







Or










222 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955










More Information







Setting the Original Type for Workflow Scans







Or


User Guide 223

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955











• Select the How Original was Produced option required.

Printed produces the best results for newspaper, magazine, map and other professionally printed originals.

Photocopied is used for most photocopied and laser printed originals.

Photograph is recommended for originals containing high quality photographs on photographic paper.

Inkjet is used specifically for originals produced on inkjet printers.

Solid Ink is recommended for originals produced on solid ink devices.


















10. Map is used if your original is a map.

11. Newspaper / Magazine is used if your original is from a magazine or newspaper that contains photographs or text.



224 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



More Information







Specifying a File Name for Workflow Scans





Use the File Name option to specify a name for the file containing the scanned images.


Or










User Guide 225

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

10. Use the touch screen keyboard to enter the file name.









More Information

Determining How the Device Processes Duplicate Workflow Scanning File Names







All Templates

Using Machine Stored Templates in Workflow Scanning





Use the Machine Stored Templates option to select your template from the device.



Or


226 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955












More Information







Using Remotely Stored Templates in Workflow Scanning





Use the Remotely Stored Templates option to select your templates from your network.



Or


User Guide 227

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955












More Information







Using the Scan to Mailbox Templates in Workflow Scanning








228 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




Or







9. To save your documents in the default public folder, select the _PUBLIC template.

10. If you select a private folder you may be prompted to enter a password. Select Enter Password and enter the password using the keypad to access the private folder. When you have finished select Done and then OK.




14. To retrieve your scanned image, open your mailbox within Internet Services. For further information see Retrieving Documents from your Mailbox.

More Information


Downloading Documents from your Mailbox using Internet Services

Printing From a Mailbox using the Print From Feature





Creating a Mailbox using Internet Services

Using the Scan to Home Templates in Workflow Scanning


User Guide 229

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




Scan to Home allows you to scan hard copy documents at the device and send them to a destination on the network, which is specified as the Home destination.

Scan to Home works with the Authentication (Login) feature. When Authentication is enabled on the device you must login with a valid account to access the services. Your login details are linked with the home destination.

Before you can use the feature, Scan to Home and Authentication (Login) must be enabled and configured by your System Administrator.

To use Scan to Home, enter your login details and select the Scan to Home template in the

Workflow Scanning service.



Or






10. Select the All Templates button.

11. Select the Scan to Home button.

12. Select the template required. If the System Administrator has not changed the name of the template, the default name is @S2HOME.




230 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

16. Press the Log In / Out button on the Control Panel.

17. At the confirmation screen, select the Logout button.

More Information






Using the Scan to USB Templates in Workflow Scanning





Use the Scan To... USB option to scan documents directly onto your USB flash drive / memory stick.



Or








9. Insert your USB Flash Drive into the USB port located to the left of the touch screen.

It may take a few seconds for the USB Drive Detected screen to open.



User Guide 231

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

12. Remove the USB Flash Drive from the USB port when you have finished.

More Information






Advanced Settings

Image Options

Choosing the Image Options for Workflow Scanning










Or







232 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955










More Information

Lightening or Darkening Workflow Scans

Changing the Sharpness of Workflow Scans

Changing the Saturation of Workflow Scans







Lightening or Darkening Workflow Scans







Or


User Guide 233

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955
















More Information

Choosing the Image Options for Workflow Scanning

Changing the Sharpness of Workflow Scans



Setting the Background Suppression for Workflow Scans





Changing the Sharpness of Workflow Scans





234 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or


















More Information









Changing the Saturation of Workflow Scans


User Guide 235

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






Or


















More Information









236 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


Choosing an Image Enhancement Option for Workflow Scanning









Or














User Guide 237

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



More Information


Setting the Workflow Scanning Contrast







Setting the Background Suppression for Workflow Scans







Or










238 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








More Information

Setting the Workflow Scanning Contrast








Setting the Workflow Scanning Contrast







Or


User Guide 239

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

















More Information








Setting the Workflow Scanning Scan Presets





240 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Use the Scan Presets options to select a group of commonly used scan settings. These options are useful if you aren’t sure exactly what settings you need, but do know what your scanned images will be used for.


Or










10. Select the Scan Presets button.

11. Select the Scan Presets option required.

• Sharing and Printing produces a medium sized file, small enough to share but high enough quality to print.

• High Quality Printing produces a large, high quality file.

• Archival - Small File Size produces a small, lower quality file suitable for viewing on a screen, but the print quality will be poor.

• Simple Scan produces a basic scanned file, no advanced settings are selected.

• OCR produces a high quality, large file with OCR (Optical Character Recognition) enabled.

This file is fully searchable.




More Information







User Guide 241

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Specifying the Workflow Scanning Resolution







Or

















242 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








More Information







Setting the Quality or File Size for Workflow Scanning








User Guide 243

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Note: If you change the Quality / File Size settings you may affect the settings in the Scan Presets options.


Or



















More Information







244 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Updating the Workflow Scanning Templates List on the Device






Use the Update Templates option to retrieve new or updated templates. Out-of-date items are removed from the list during an update.

Templates are created in Internet Services by your System Administrator.





4. If required, select a type of template other than All Templates to activate the Advanced

Settings tab.

8. Select the second Update Now button to confirm the update.

Note: Selecting this option may cause a delay and the Workflow Scanning service will be unavailable for several minutes. The delay does not affect the other services available on the device.


More Information







User Guide 245

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Layout Adjustment

Setting the Original Orientation for Workflow Scanning







Or















Document Feeder.


Document Feeder.

246 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






More Information







Specifying the Size of the Original to be Scanned into a Workflow







Or









User Guide 247

Scan


WorkCentre

®

5945/5955












More Information







Erasing Edges from Workflow Scans





248 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or










10. Select the Edge Erase button.








More Information







User Guide 249

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Removing Blank Pages from Workflow Scan Originals During Scanning





Use the Blank Page Management option to ignore the non-imaged pages in your originals when scanning. The Background Suppression and Edge Erase features may improve Remove Blank Pages performance.


Or










10. Select the Blank Page Management button.


• Include Blank Pages includes any pages with no image on them in your job.

• Remove Blank Pages ignores non-imaged pages in your originals when scanning. This setting is useful when scanning 2-sided originals that may have no image on side 2 for some pages.





250 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information



Erasing Edges from Workflow Scans






Filing Options

Setting a File Format for Workflow Scans





Use the Filing Options to specify details about the scanned images to be stored, such as the file format, whether the document is stored as a single file per page or as a multi-page document, or whether the scanned document should be searchable.


Or










10. Select the File Format button.

User Guide 251

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

11. Select the type of file required.

• PDF (Portable Document Format) produces a single file, or an individual file per page.The output is not searchable. Depending on the receiving device, the PDF selection may not be compatible when the resolution is set to 200 dpi. This option is best used for sharing and printing documents.

• PDF/A produces a single file, or an individual file per page. The output is not searchable.

This is best used for long-term archival storage of electronic documents.

• XPS (XML Paper Specification) outputs a single file, or an individual file per page. The output is not searchable. XPS is best used for sharing and printing documents containing text and photos.

• TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) produces a single file or an individual file per page. The output is not searchable. TIFFs are best used for archiving.

• JPEG produces files best used for on-screen viewing and sharing of files. JPEG files are not searchable or created as multi-page documents.

12. Select the page option required.

• Multi-Page produces a single file containing several pages of scanned images.

• 1 File per Page produces a separate file for each image scanned.

13. Select the Image Only search setting required.

• Image Only produces images that are not searchable.

• Searchable results in searchable text. If required, use the drop-down menu to change the language your document is written in.





More Information







Determining How the Device Processes Duplicate Workflow Scanning File

Names





252 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Use the Filing Options to determine how the device handles duplicate file names. It can overwrite the existing file, cancel the scan process or automatically generate a new file name.


Or










10. Select the If File Already Exists button.

11. Select the If File Already Exists option required.

• Add Number to Name (000,001,002...) adds a sequential number to the end of the file name.

• Add Date and Time to Name (YYYYMMDDhhmmss) adds the current date and time to the end of the file name.

• Add to <File Format> Folder creates a folder with the same name as the file and adds the new file to the folder. The name of the folder varies depending on the file format selected, for example if your output is a PDF the option will be Add to PDF Folder.

• Overwrite Existing File deletes the existing file and saves the new file instead.

• Do Not Save stops the process, the file is not saved.





More Information







User Guide 253

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Assigning Descriptive Data to a Workflow Scanning Job





Use the Document Management option to assign descriptive data (metadata) to a scanned job.

The data can be accessed by other software applications to search, index and the automate the processing of scanned documents.

Document Management data fields can be either mandatory or optional. If the data is mandatory, you will be prompted to enter the data before scanning can begin. If the data is optional, you will be prompted to enter the data, but will be able to complete the job without the data.


Or










Either

• If your System Administrator has set up the Document Management feature with mandatory fields you will be asked to complete the required document information as soon as you select a template. Use the touch screen keyboard to enter or edit the document information as required.

Select the OK button.

Press the Start button on the control panel to scan the original.

Remove the original from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed.

Press the Job Status button on the device control panel to view the job list and check the status of the job.

254 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Or

• If your System Administrator has not set up the Document Management feature with mandatory fields select the Filing Options tab.

Select the Document Management button.

Select the section you want to edit.

Use the touch screen keyboard to enter or edit the document information as required.

Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be entered.

To delete a character use the backspace X button.

Use the special characters button to access special characters such as $ and %.

Buttons with an icon in the lower right corner have accented or additional characters available. Select and hold the button to view related characters in a pop-up menu. Select the desired character from the pop-up menu.

Select Done to save your data.

Select the OK button.

Press the Start button on the control panel to scan the original.

Remove the original from the document feeder or document glass when scanning has completed.

Press the Job Status button on the device control panel to view the job list and check the status of the job.

More Information


Modifying a Template using Internet Services





Adding Additional Workflow Scanning File Destinations





Use the Add File Destination option to select additional filing destinations from the list. Every filing destination must be set up in Internet Services by your System Administrator.


Or


User Guide 255

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955









10. Select the Add File Destinations button.

11. Select the required destination. You can select more than one destination.





More Information







Building a Workflow Scanning Job with Multiple Page or Segment

Settings






256 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or





















Or




User Guide 257

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955














More Information







258 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Scan To

Using the Scan To Feature

Use the Scan To... Feature to scan a document and store it in a folder on your computer or network.

To use Scan To you need to create an entry in the Device Address Book which contains the path to the location that you want to scan to.

The Scan To button is grayed out on the device touch screen if there are no Scan To entries in the

Device Address Book.


If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter login details to access the Scan To features.


Or


5. If required, select the Device Address Book button. (Your System Administrator may have set up the address book to automatically open.)

6. Select the address required.





More Information




Scanning to a Favorite Address using the Scan To Feature



User Guide 259

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





Use the Favorites option to select a stored address from the E-mail, Fax, Internet Fax or Scan To services. Favorites are useful if you regularly send a document to the same address. Your System

Administrator can create Favorites in the Device Address Book.



Or


5. If required, select Scan Favorites from the Scan Contacts dropdown menu. (Your System

Administrator may have set up favorites to automatically open.)


















260 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






















14. Select the File Name button.









More Information




User Guide 261

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Scan To

Setting the Output Color using the Scan To Feature









Or












More Information




262 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Using the Scan To Feature to send 2-Sided Originals









Or











More Information




User Guide 263

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Setting the Original Type using the Scan To Feature









Or

















264 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



















More Information




Specifying a File Name using the Scan To Feature







User Guide 265

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or












More Information




Advanced Settings

Image Options

Choosing the Image Options when using the Scan To Feature





266 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








Or










More Information





Lightening or Darkening Documents using the Scan To Feature

Changing the Sharpness of Scan To Documents

Changing the Saturation of Scan To Documents

User Guide 267

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Lightening or Darkening Documents using the Scan To Feature









Or











More Information





Setting the Background Suppression using the Scan To Feature

268 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Changing the Sharpness of Scan To Documents









Or












More Information





User Guide 269

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Changing the Saturation of Scan To Documents









Or












More Information





270 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


Choosing an Image Enhancement Option when using the Scan To Feature











Or










User Guide 271

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information




Setting the Background Suppression using the Scan To Feature

Setting the Contrast using the Scan To Feature

Setting the Background Suppression using the Scan To Feature









Or









272 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



More Information





Lightening or Darkening Documents using the Scan To Feature

Setting the Contrast using the Scan To Feature









Or







User Guide 273

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






More Information





Setting the Scan Presets using the Scan To Feature









Or





274 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955











More Information





Specifying the Resolution using the Scan To Feature









Or



User Guide 275

Scan


WorkCentre

®

5945/5955















More Information





Setting the Quality or File Size using the Scan To Feature







276 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




Note: If you change the Quality / File Size settings you may affect the settings in the Scan Presets options.


Or













More Information





User Guide 277

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Layout Adjustment

Setting the Original Orientation using the Scan To Feature









Or









Document Feeder.


Document Feeder.



278 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




More Information





Specifying the Size of the Original to be Scanned using the Scan To Feature









Or





User Guide 279

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955












More Information





Erasing Edges from Documents using the Scan To Feature







280 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or












More Information





User Guide 281

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Removing Blank Pages from Originals During Scanning using the Scan To

Feature









Or












282 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information





Filing Options

Setting a File Format using the Scan To Feature









Or









User Guide 283

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955














More Information





Determining How the Device Processes Duplicate File Names when using the

Scan To Feature







284 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Use the Filing Options to determine how the device handles duplicate file names. It can overwrite the existing file, cancel the scan process or automatically generate a new file name.


Or




10. Select the If File Already Exists button.

11. Select the If File Already Exists option required.

• Add Number to Name (000,001,002...) adds a sequential number to the end of the file name.

• Add Date and Time to Name (YYYYMMDDhhmmss) adds the current date and time to the end of the file name.

• Add to <File Format> Folder creates a folder with the same name as the file and adds the new file to the folder. The name of the folder varies depending on the file format selected, for example if your output is a PDF the option will be Add to PDF Folder.







More Information





User Guide 285

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Building a Job with Multiple Page or Segment Settings using the

Scan To Feature










Or













286 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or

















More Information





User Guide 287

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Scanning to a USB Memory Stick using the Scan To Feature

Use the Scan To... USB option to scan documents directly onto your USB flash drive / memory stick.





Or







More Information


Printing From USB using the Print From Feature



Single-Touch Scan

Scanning a Document to your Computer or Network using Single-

Touch Scan

The Single-Touch Scan feature is a fast and convenient way to scan a document and send it to a predefined scan destination on your computer or network location.

Your System Administrator will create a button on the device touch screen for each Single-Touch

Scan destination (up to 10 buttons) and can customize the color scheme, logo and instructional text that displays when you select the Single-Touch Scan button. Your System Administrator can also change the name of the Single-Touch Scan button.

288 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

The Single-Touch Scan service can be configured with scan settings already specified so that you can scan your document quickly. Your System Administrator can also customize the service so that you can select the Build Job, Output Color, Original Type, 2-Sided Scanning and File Name settings each time you scan your document.


If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter login details to access the Single-Touch Scan feature.


Or


Note: Your System Administrator can customize the name of the Single-Touch Scan button.

Check with your System Administrator if you do not see a Single-Touch Scan button on the touch screen.


of the job.

More Information





Building a Single-Touch Scan Job with Multiple Settings







User Guide 289

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955







Or













More Information




290 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Setting the Output Color for a Single-Touch Scan









Or










of the job.

More Information




User Guide 291

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Using Single-Touch Scan to Send 2-Sided Originals









Or









of the job.

More Information




292 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Setting the Original Type for Single-Touch Scans









Or











6. Select the How Original was Produced option required.




User Guide 293

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





More Information




Specifying a File Name for Single-Touch Scans









Or


294





User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




of the job.

More Information




User Guide 295

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Remote Scan

Scanning an image using the Xerox TWAIN Scan Driver

The Xerox TWAIN scan driver scans images directly to your computer. The TWAIN driver can be used by many popular software applications to import scanned images. The scan driver allows you to use the specific features available on your device.

Your System Administrator can configure access to the remote scanning feature. If scanning to your application is not available or does not work, ask your System Administrator to enable the remote scanning feature and install the Xerox TWAIN scan driver.



Or


3. Using your computer, open the application you wish to scan the image to.

4. Begin the import process. From most applications select File, then select Import.

5. If required, follow any instructions within your application until you are given the opportunity to choose a scan driver or scanner.

6. If required, select the Xerox TWAIN driver from the list of drivers available.

7. If required, select the device required from the list of scanners available.

8. Select the Scan Size option required.

• Auto lets the scanner detect the image size automatically.

• Mixed Size Originals programs scan sets using source pages of different sizes.

• Standard Paper Sizes accepted by the scanner are listed.

9. Select the Side to Scan option required.










296 User Guide

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



11. Select the Image Color option required.





12. Click the Scan button to save your settings and scan the image.


14. Open the Xerox TWAIN Driver folder (or other destination folder you have selected) to retrieve your scanned document.

More Information



Accessing the TWAIN Scan Driver Help Pages

The Xerox TWAIN scan driver scans images directly to your computer. The TWAIN driver can be used by many popular software applications to import scanned images. The scan driver allows you to use the specific features available on your device.

Your System Administrator can configure access to the remote scanning feature. If scanning to your application is not available or does not work, ask your System Administrator to enable the remote scanning feature and install the Xerox TWAIN scan driver.



Or


3. Using your computer, open the application you wish to scan the image to.

4. Begin the import process. From most applications select File, then select Import.

5. If required, follow any instructions within your application until you are given the opportunity to choose a scan driver or scanner.

6. If required, select the device required from the list of scanners available.

7. If required, select the Xerox TWAIN driver from the list of drivers available.

More Information



User Guide 297

Scan WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

298 User Guide

Print

6

PCL Driver




















User Guide 299

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955














of the job.



More Information












300 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Tab menu

Printing Options

Job Type

Using the Job Type Feature with the PCL Print Driver




Use the Job Type option to specify how your job should be treated by the device, for example whether it should be treated as a confidential document (Secure Print) or a proof print (Sample

Set).

Use the Normal Print job type to tell the device to print your job as soon as it arrives at the top of the print queue.

Use the Secure Print option to have your job held at the device until you enter a passcode to release it. This feature prevents confidential documents printing to the output tray until you are ready to release and collect them. This feature is also useful if you want to control when your jobs are released for printing, even if they are not confidential.

Note: If you send more than one Secure Print job using the same passcode, when you go to the device you will only need to enter the code once to release all the jobs for printing.

Use the Sample Set option to print one copy of a multiple-copy print job. When you collect the print you can check it has printed as you expected before approving the rest of the job for printing. If the first copy is not correct you can cancel the rest of the copies and resubmit the job with different print settings.

Use the Delay Print option to print your document at a specified time, up to 24 hours after the original job submission. This is useful if you want to print large jobs during quiet times in your office, or if you want all your jobs to print at the same time.




User Guide 301

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








6. Select the option required from the Job Type menu.








More Information












302 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Printing a Normal Print Job using the PCL Print Driver


















More Information







User Guide 303

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Printing a Secure Print Job using the PCL Print Driver













7. Click in the Passcode entry box and use your keyboard to enter a 4 to 10 digit passcode.


passcode.




13. When the job arrives at the device it displays in the Secure Print job list. To view the list at the device press the Job Status button on the Control Panel and select Secure Print Jobs.

14. Select your job in the list, enter your Secure Print passcode and select OK.

15. Select Release All to print all your secure jobs, or select an individual job and select Release.

304 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information






Printing a Sample Set Job using the PCL Print Driver









Note: You must send at least 2 copies to the device for the Sample Set feature to work.







User Guide 305

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


Unidentified Print Jobs list. Select the job in the required list and select the Release button to print the sample set.

12. Check the printed sample is correct.

13. Select the job required from the list.

• If the sample is correct, select the Release button to print the remaining sets.

• If the sample has not printed as you expected it to, select the Delete button.


More Information







Printing a Delay Print Job using the PCL Print Driver











print.

306 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




12. At the specified time, collect your document at the device.





More Information






Saving Jobs using the PCL Print Driver











User Guide 307

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955















More Information







Sending a Fax using the PCL Print Driver




308 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955











Either











Or







User Guide 309

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






























310 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


• If required, select Send to Printer from the Confirmation menu to have the device print a page stating that your job has successfully faxed. Depending on how your System

Administrator has configured the device an error sheet may print if the job fails.

• If required, select Send to E-mail from the Confirmation menu and enter a valid E-mail address to have the device email a page stating that your job has successfully faxed.

Depending on how your System Administrator has configured the device an error sheet may print if the job fails.










More Information





Specifying a Paper Type using the PCL Print Driver




Use the Paper option to specify a type of paper for your job. The type of paper automatically selected for your job is shown in the Paper box, this default is set by your System Administrator.

User Guide 311

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

The paper types loaded in the device are listed. You can select other paper types - but you will need to load them into the appropriate tray before your job will print correctly. It is usually easier to load the paper required into the device before programming your job as this helps to ensure you select both the correct paper type and the correct tray when sending your job.







6. Select the Paper option required.

• Fit to New Size automatically reduces or enlarges the print image to fit on the size of paper selected from the menu.

• Other Size opens the Paper Size screen where you can specify both the paper size you require and any scaling amount needed to fit your document onto your chosen paper size.

• Other Color lists commonly used paper colors. Use the Automatically Select option to let the printer select a paper color.

• Other Type selects a type of paper or media to use for the print job, for example transparencies. Use the Automatically Select option to let the printer to select a type.

• Select by Tray specifies a particular paper tray for your job. The printer only uses the paper in the selected tray, even when more than one tray contains the same paper size and type.

Use the Automatically Select option to let the printer select a tray loaded with the size and type of paper selected for the job.

• Transparency Separators interleaves each printed transparency with a blank or printed sheet of paper from a specified paper tray.







More Information






312 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4


Printing 2-Sided using the PCL Print Driver




Use the 2-Sided Printing option to select whether your job prints on one or both sides of the paper and whether the output should be suitable for binding on the long or short edge of the document.

Note: Some media types, sizes, and weights cannot be automatically printed on both sides. Refer to www.xerox.com

for information.







6. Select the 2-Sided Printing option required.

• 1-Sided Print prints on 1 side of the paper or transparency. Use this option when printing on transparencies, envelopes or labels.

• 2-Sided Print prints on both sides of a sheet of paper. The images are printed so the job can be bound on the long edge of the sheet.

• 2-Sided Print, Flip on Short Edge prints on both sides of a sheet of paper. The images are printed so the job can be bound on the short edge of the sheet.






User Guide 313

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information





Finishing

Choosing a Finishing Option when using the PCL Print Driver






The options available from your print driver depend on how your System Administrator has configured the print driver on your computer.



Use the Hole Punch option if you want the device to punch holes in each page after it is printed.

Each sheet will be punched individually so there is no limit to the number of pages you can have in a set. Hole punching can only be selected for A4 LEF (8.5 x 11" LEF) and A3 (11 x 17”) paper.







314 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






More Information




Stapling using the PCL Print Driver














User Guide 315

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

6. Select the stapling option required from the Finishing menu.









More Information





Hole Punching using the PCL Print Driver









316 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955














More Information


Choosing a Finishing Option when using the PCL Print Driver




Folding using the PCL Print Driver





User Guide 317

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



The folding options vary depending on the type of finisher attached to your device. If there is no finisher attached to your device you will not be able to choose any folding options.








7. Select the Folding option required.

• Bi Fold Single Sheets Print Inside folds the output in the middle of the page. If the page is single sided the printed content will be on the inside of the fold. If the page is double sided, page 1 will be on the inside.

• Bi Fold Single Sheets Print Outside folds the output in the middle of the page. If the page is single sided the printed content will be on the outside of the fold. If the page is double sided, page 2 will be on the inside.

• Bi Fold Multiple Sheets Print Outside folds the output in the middle of each page. If the pages are single sided the printed content will be on the inside of the fold. If the pages are double sided, page 1 will be on the inside.

• Bi Fold Multiple Sheets Print Inside folds the output in the middle of the page. If the pages are single sided the printed content will be on the outside of the fold. If the pages are double sided, page 2 will be on the inside.







318 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information






Stapling and Hole Punching using the PCL Print Driver







Use the Multiple Finishing option to hole punch and staple your document.











User Guide 319

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

7. Select the Stapling option required.

• No Stapling cancels any stapling programming you have entered.



• Multiple Staples positions either three or four staples on the edge selected. The number of staples depends on the size of the media chosen. For example: 4 Staples = A4 LEF (8.5 x

11” LEF), A3 (11 x 17”) and 8 x 10” LEF. 3 Staples = 8 x 10” SEF, A4 SEF (8.5 x 11” SEF), A5

LEF (8.5 x 5.5” LEF) and B5 SEF (8.5 x 14” SEF).



• If required, select No Hole Punching to cancel any programming you have entered.







More Information






Booklet Creation

Creating a Booklet Layout using the PCL Print Driver





320 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Use the Booklet Layout option to have the device automatically reduce and arrange the pages of your original in the correct sequence to form a booklet when the pages are folded in half.

If your device is fitted with a Booklet Maker you can use the Booklet Finishing feature to automatically produce folded and stapled booklets.







8. If required, click the Booklet Adjustments button to specify precise layout options.

• Select the Booklet Paper Size option required.

Use Job Setting creates the booklet using the paper size selected in your source document.

Manual activates a dropdown menu where you can select the paper size required.

• Select Standard from the Booklet Margins menu to create a margin between each image on your booklet.

• If required, select None to cancel any programming you have made.


9. If required, check the Page Borders checkbox to print a border around each image.









User Guide 321

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information






Folding Booklets using the PCL Print Driver







Use the Booklet Fold option to have the device automatically reduce and arrange the pages of your original in the correct sequence to form a booklet when the pages are folded in half - and to fold the pages automatically when they are printed.








• Select the Imposition Source option required.

Imposed By Driver automatically arranges the pages of your original in the correct sequence to form a booklet when the pages are folded in half.

Pre-Imposed By App lets the application you are printing from determine the correct page sequence to form a booklet when the pages are folded in half. Most desktop publishing applications can create a booklet layout.

322 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955















More Information






Folding and Stapling Booklets using the PCL Print Driver







User Guide 323

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Use the Booklet Fold and Staple option to have the device automatically reduce and arrange the pages of your original in the correct sequence to form a booklet when the pages are folded in half

- and to fold and staple the pages automatically when they are printed.


























324 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information






Setting the Print Quality using the PCL Print Driver




Use the Print Quality options to adjust the amount of toner used to print your documents. Using very little toner produces a slightly more grainy appearance, particularly when printing graphics or solid color objects, but is the most environmentally friendly option.







6. Select the Print Quality option required.

• Standard balances print quality with environmental considerations and the size of the file sent across your network. Standard print quality is suitable for most print jobs.

• Toner Saver uses less toner than the other options. Documents may appear slightly lighter than with the other options.






User Guide 325

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information





Choosing an Output Destination when using the PCL Print Driver




Use the Output Destination options to specify a destination for your output. The destinations depend on the type of finisher attached to your device.

Note: If a destination is listed, but is shown in gray text, it may not be available due to a finishing option that you have selected.








6. Select the Output Destination option required.

• Automatically Select sends the job to an output tray based on the job type.

• Top Tray sends the job to the output tray at the top of the device.

• Stacker Tray the document will print to the stacker tray at the side of the device.

• Booklet Maker Tray sends the job to the output tray on the right side of the device.




326 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




More Information






Document Options

Page Layout

Printing more than one Page on a Sheet using the PCL Print Driver










7. Check the required radio button to choose how many pages to print per sheet.

Note: The number of pages per sheet is the number of pages per side of the sheet. For example, if you select 2 Pages Per Sheet and print your document 2 sided the device will print 2 pages on each side of your sheet (4 pages in total).


User Guide 327

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

9. If required, select a 1 or 2-Sided option from the dropdown menu located under the preview picture.











More Information






Creating a Booklet Layout using the PCL Print Driver Layout Options





328 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955







does not open click the Setup... button.

















More Information





User Guide 329

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Folding Booklets using the PCL Print Driver Layout Options


























330 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





More Information






Folding and Stapling Booklets using the PCL Print Driver Layout Options












User Guide 331

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




















More Information






Special Pages

Choosing a Special Pages Option using the PCL Print Driver



332 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955













10. Click the Add Inserts button.

Note: If the Add Inserts button is greyed out it is because you have selected a finishing option that is incompatible with inserts or your job only has 1 page.



13. Click the Add Exceptions button.

Note: If the Add Exceptions button is greyed out it is because you have selected a finishing option that is incompatible with inserts or your job only has 1 page.







User Guide 333

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





More Information





Adding Covers using the PCL Print Driver











8. Select the Cover Options option required.

• No Covers cancels any programming you have entered.





334 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


9. If required, select the Front Cover Paper options required.

• You can select a specific paper size, color and type. Use the Blank or Pre-Printed menu to choose any print settings for the cover.

10. If required, select the Back Cover Paper options required.










More Information







Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4


Adding Inserts using the PCL Print Driver




User Guide 335

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








8. Select the Insert Options option you require.

• After Pages activates the Pages entry box. Select the Pages entry box and use your keyboard to enter the page number required.

• Before Page 1 adds the insert pages at the beginning of the document.

Note: The page numbers are the physical page numbers and not the page numbers which may be printed on the document. For 2-sided documents, each page of your document has 2 page numbers, so you need to count each side of your document. inserted.

10. Select the Paper option(s) required. You can select a specific paper size, color and type. You can also specify that the inserts should be printed using the existing job settings.









More Information



336 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4



Setting Exceptions using the PCL Print Driver











that are exceptions.



• Use Job Setting uses any programming already entered for the job.






User Guide 337

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955







More Information





Designing and Applying a Watermark to Prints using the PCL Print Driver




Use the Watermark option to add a picture or some text to your document from within the print driver. You can set the watermark image to appear behind or on top of your main document text.






7. Select the Watermark option required.

• Custom creates a brand new watermark.

• Draft provides a standard draft watermark which you can customize.

• Confidential generates a standard Confidential watermark which you can then customize to meet your needs.

338 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

• Copy produces a watermark that identifies the document as a copy. This watermark can be customized.


• Text activates a text entry box where you can type in your text. There are options to select a font, color, orientation and position for your text.

• Time Stamp creates a time specific watermark. There are options to select the format, a font, color, orientation and position for your timestamp watermark.

• Picture activates the graphic settings. Click the folder icon to browse to your image. There are options to select a scale, the position and the lightness of your graphic.

9. If required, select a Layering option.

• Print in Background prints your cover sheet text over your watermark, so some of the watermark may be covered.

• Blend gives equal prominence to your cover sheet text and your watermark.

• Print in Foreground prints your cover sheet text under your watermark, so some of the cover sheet text may be covered.

10. Select the Pages option required.

• Print on Page 1 Only adds the image to the first page of the document.

• Print on All Pages adds the image to every page of the document.








More Information





Setting the Orientation of a Print Job using the PCL Print Driver




User Guide 339

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Use the Orientation option to set your job to portrait or landscape orientation.







• Portrait orients the paper so that the text and images print across the short dimension of the paper.

• Landscape orients the paper so that the text and images print across the long dimension of the paper.







More Information





Advanced

Using the Advanced PCL Print Driver Features

The Advanced tab gives you access to advanced printing features. Most of the time you will not need to use these features except, perhaps to turn on or off the Job ID feature.

Detailed instructions for the advanced features can be found in the print driver help pages, and technical instructions for some items are in the System Administrator Guide.

The advanced features are only likely to be needed by your System Administrator or Xerox support team.

340 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information

Accessing the PCL Print Driver Help Pages



Adding a Job ID using the PCL Driver

Removing a Job ID using the PCL Print Driver

Adding a Job ID using the PCL Driver




Use the Job ID option to print some identification with your print job. You can choose whether to print the information on a separate page from the main job, or whether to print it within the margins.

If your System Administrator has created an ID for you they may have chosen to set up your ID to include specific information such as your name or your user name.







6. If required, double click the Advanced Settings folder to expand the menu. The menu is usually expanded automatically when you select the Advanced tab.

7. Select the Job ID option required.

• Print ID on a Banner Page adds a covering page to your job. Your ID will be printed on the cover page. If you select any finishing options such as stapling, the ID page will not be stapled to the rest of your job.

• Print ID in Margins - First Page Only prints your ID in the top margin, on the first page of your document.

• Print ID in Margins - All Pages prints your ID in the top margin, on all the pages in your document. If your document is 2-sided the ID will print on both sides.



User Guide 341

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





More Information





Removing a Job ID using the PCL Print Driver













342 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955







More Information





Menu at the bottom of the Tabs

Using Saved Print Settings using the PCL Print Driver




Use this option when you to want to select your saved print settings.






5. Select the Saved Settings option required.

• Driver Defaults sets the printing properties to the default settings.

• Earth Smart Printing sets the printing properties to environmentally friendly settings.

• Any custom settings you have saved will be listed underneath the Earth Smart Printing option.

• Save As saves the current printer settings as custom settings.

User Guide 343

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

• Save As *Application Name* Default saves the current settings and makes them the default settings for the named application. This option is useful if, for example, you always want to print Word documents 2-sided but Excel spreadsheets 1-sided.

• Rename makes it possible to change the name for the custom print settings you have currently selected. This is not available if the driver or application default print settings are selected.

• Delete permanently erases the custom print settings you currently have selected. This is not available if the driver default print settings are selected.

6. Click the option you require.







More Information





Saving Print Settings using the PCL Print Driver

Renaming Saved Print Settings using the PCL Print Driver

Deleting Saved Print Settings using the PCL Print Driver

Saving Print Settings using the PCL Print Driver




344 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Use the Saved Settings option if you often use the same settings in your print driver. The Saved

Settings option stores your print driver selections in the Saved Settings list. This list is saved on your computer and will not be available to you if you print from a different computer.








custom setting.









More Information





Applying Saved Print Settings using the PCL Print Driver



User Guide 345

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Saving Print Settings as Application Defaults using the PCL Print Driver




Use the Save Print Settings as Application Defaults option to store custom printing settings as the defaults for the current application.








application default settings and will be selected for the current print job.

More Information




Applying Saved Print Settings using the PCL Print Driver



346 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Applying Saved Print Settings using the PCL Print Driver












5. Select the saved setting required from the Saved Settings menu.







More Information








User Guide 347

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Renaming Saved Print Settings using the PCL Print Driver




Use the Rename option to change the name you assigned to your saved print settings.






5. Select the saved settings required from the list.


custom setting.


11. Click the Print button.







More Information





Saving Print Settings as Application Defaults using the PCL Print Driver

348 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Deleting Saved Print Settings using the PCL Print Driver




Use the Delete option to erase a specific set of custom print settings you have saved.






5. Select a custom setting or select <Application Name> Defaults from the Saved Settings

menu.

More Information




Saving Print Settings as Application Defaults using the PCL Print Driver


Accessing the PCL Print Driver Help Pages




User Guide 349

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






More Information




Resetting Defaults for the PCL Print Driver




Use the Reset Defaults option to reset the settings to either the Xerox settings or the settings programmed by your System Administrator.






5. Click the circular arrow to reset your print settings to their installation defaults.

More Information




Setting Earth Smart Print Settings using the PCL Print Driver


350 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Use the Earth Smart option to quickly set controls that will reduce the number of pages printed for your job by removing banner sheets, turning on 2-sided printing, and printing 2 images on each page instead of a single image per page.







• 2-Sided Print prints on both sides of a sheet to save paper.

• No Banner Pages disables the printing of banner pages to save paper.

• 2-Up prints 2 reduced size pages on a single sheet to save paper.

• Sample Set prints one copy of a multiple-copy print job. When you collect the print you can check it has printed as you expected before approving the rest of the job for printing.

If the first copy is not correct you can cancel the rest of the copies and resubmit the job with different print settings.






More Information




Printing a Sample Set Job using the PCL Print Driver


User Guide 351

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Viewing the Device Status using the PCL Print Driver




Use the Status section to view the basic status of your device, such as the content of the paper trays.

Use the More Status option to see more detailed information including any alerts or warnings, an active jobs list, a completed jobs list and the permissions your System Administrator has set for the device.

Note: Your System Administrator must enable Bi-Directional Communication between your device and your print driver before you can use this feature. If you do not see paper tray graphics and a

More Status button then Bi-Directional Communication has not been enabled.















4. View the device status icons in the bottom right corner of the driver window (above the OK and

Cancel buttons).

5. If required, click on the More Status [...] button next to the status display.

More Information




352 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

PostScript Driver























User Guide 353

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955










of the job.




More Information












Tab menu


Job Type

Using the Job Type Feature with the PostScript Print Driver


354 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




Set).
















User Guide 355

Print



WorkCentre

®

5945/5955







More Information












Printing a Normal Print Job using the PostScript Driver









356 User Guide

Print




WorkCentre

®

5945/5955







More Information







Printing a Secure Print Job using the PostScript Driver





User Guide 357

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955










passcode.








More Information






Printing a Sample Set Job using the PostScript Driver



358 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




















More Information







User Guide 359

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Printing a Delay Print Job using the PostScript Driver











print.









More Information




360 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Saving Jobs using the PostScript Print Driver

















User Guide 361

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955









More Information







Sending a Fax using the PostScript Print Driver













362 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


Either











Or

















User Guide 363

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

































364 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information





Specifying a Paper Type using the PostScript Print Driver














Fit to New Size automatically reduces or enlarges the print image to fit on the size of paper selected from the menu.





User Guide 365

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

• Transparency Separators interleaves each printed transparency with a blank or printed sheet of paper from a specified paper tray.







More Information







Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4


Printing 2-Sided using the PostScript Print Driver






for information.





366 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955













More Information





Finishing

Choosing a Finishing Option when using the PostScript Print Driver






User Guide 367

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








Use the Folding options to fold a single sheet of A4 (8.5 x 11”) media in a weight range of 60 to

120 gsm (16 to 32 lb).










More Information




Stapling using the PostScript Print Driver



368 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955
























More Information





User Guide 369

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Hole Punching using the PostScript Print Driver





















370 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information


Choosing a Finishing Option when using the PostScript Print Driver




Folding using the PostScript Print Driver









120 gsm (16 to 32 lb). Pages can be bi-folded in half or tri-folded in a C fold or Z fold .








User Guide 371

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






• C-Tri Fold Print Inside folds the output into three equal sections. If the page is single sided the printed content will be on the inside of the folds, with the outside front panel blank. If the page is double sided, part of page 2 will be on the outside front panel.

• C-Tri Fold Print Outside folds the output into three equal sections. If the page is single sided the printed content will be on the outside of the folds, with the outside front panel showing part of page 1. If the page is double sided, part of page 2 will be on the outside front panel.

• Z-Tri Fold Print Inside folds the output into three equal sections. If the page is single sided the printed content will be on the inside of the first fold and the outside of the second fold.

If the page is double sided, page 1 will be on the inside of the first fold and the outside of the second fold.

• Z-Tri Fold Print Outside folds the output to create three equal sections. If the page is single sided the printed content will be on the outside of the first fold and the inside of the second fold. If the page is double sided, page 2 will be on the inside of the first fold and the outside of the second fold.







More Information






372 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Stapling and Hole Punching using the PostScript Print Driver

























User Guide 373

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955










More Information







Creating a Booklet Layout using the PostScript Print Driver








374 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955














• Select the Gutter entry box and use your keyboard to enter a width for the center margin of your booklet.

• Select the Creep entry box and use your keyboard to enter an amount to shift the page images outwards by. This feature compensates for the fact that the outer pages in a large booklet have to fold around all the inner pages, this makes the outer pages slightly shorter than the inner pages in the final booklet.

• Select the Reading Order option required.

Left to Right places page 1 of your document on the front of your booklet when the fold is to the left or top of the booklet.

Right to Left places page 1 of your document on the front of your booklet when the fold is to the right or bottom of the booklet.










User Guide 375

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information






Folding Booklets using the PostScript Print Driver














376 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

























More Information






User Guide 377

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Folding and Stapling Booklets using the PostScript Print Driver

























378 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955















More Information






Setting the Print Quality using the PostScript Print Driver




User Guide 379

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955









• High Resolution prints your document at the highest quality. High Resolution uses more toner than the Toner Saver option.









More Information





Choosing an Output Destination when using the PostScript Print Driver



380 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






















More Information






User Guide 381

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Image Options

Adjusting the Lightness of your Print using the PostScript Driver










6. Select the Lightness option required.

• Move the indicator to the left to darken the image.

• Move the indicator to the right to lighten the image.







More Information





382 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Adjusting the Contrast of your Print using the PostScript Driver










6. Select the Contrast option required.

• Move the indicator to the right to increase the contrast. This will produce more vivid blacks and whites for sharper text and lines but less detail in pictures.

• Move the indicator to the left to decrease the contrast. This will produce more detail in light and dark areas of the original.







More Information





User Guide 383

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


Page Layout

Printing more than one Page on a Sheet using the PostScript Print Driver





















384 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




More Information






Creating a Booklet Layout using the PostScript Print Driver Layout Options
















User Guide 385

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


















More Information





Folding Booklets using the PostScript Print Driver Layout Options





386 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



























User Guide 387

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








More Information






Folding and Stapling Booklets using the PostScript Print Driver Layout Options













388 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


























User Guide 389

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information






Special Pages

Choosing a Special Pages Option using the PostScript Print Driver















390 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

















More Information







Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4


Adding Covers using the PostScript Print Driver




User Guide 391

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



























More Information


392 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





Loading Tray 4

Loading Tray 3



Adding Inserts using the PostScript Print Driver
















User Guide 393

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955









More Information







Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4


Setting Exceptions using the PostScript Print Driver










394 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

















More Information





Designing and Applying a Watermark to Prints using the PostScript Print Driver




User Guide 395

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





























396 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information





Setting the Orientation of a Print Job using the PostScript Print Driver













• Rotated landscape orients the paper so that the content is rotated 180 degrees with the long bottom edge uppermost.




User Guide 397

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




More Information





Advanced

Adding a Job ID using the PostScript Print Driver













398 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955











More Information





Removing a Job ID using the PostScript Print Driver






User Guide 399

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955














More Information





Using the Advanced PostScript Print Driver Features




More Information

Accessing the PostScript Print Driver Help Pages



400 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


Using Saved Print Settings using the PostScript Print Driver























User Guide 401

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




More Information




Saving Print Settings using the PostScript Print Driver

Renaming Saved Print Settings using the PostScript Print Driver

Deleting Saved Print Settings using the PostScript Print Driver


Saving Print Settings using the PostScript Print Driver












custom setting.



402 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






More Information




Applying Saved Print Settings using the PostScript Print Driver




Saving Print Settings as Application Defaults using the PostScript Print Driver













User Guide 403

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information




Applying Saved Print Settings using the PostScript Print Driver



Applying Saved Print Settings using the PostScript Print Driver




Use the Saved Settings option to apply a selection of print settings that you have already saved.














More Information




404 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


Saving Print Settings as Application Defaults using the PostScript Print Driver




Renaming Saved Print Settings using the PostScript Print Driver











custom setting.








User Guide 405

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information








Deleting Saved Print Settings using the PostScript Print Driver











menu.

More Information






Accessing the PostScript Print Driver Help Pages


406 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








More Information




Resetting Defaults for the PostScript Print Driver











More Information




User Guide 407

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Setting Earth Smart Print Settings using the PostScript Print Driver






















408 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information




Printing a Sample Set Job using the PostScript Driver


Viewing the Device Status using the PostScript Print Driver























Cancel buttons).

User Guide 409

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information




XPS Driver




















410 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955













of the job.




More Information













User Guide 411

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Tab menu


Job Type

Using the Job Type Feature with the XPS Print Driver






Set).









412 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955
















More Information












Printing a Normal Print Job using the XPS Print Driver



User Guide 413

Print











WorkCentre

®

5945/5955







More Information







Printing a Secure Print Job using the XPS Print Driver



414 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955













passcode.








More Information






User Guide 415

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Printing a Sample Set Job using the XPS Print Driver























416 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information







Printing a Delay Print Job using the XPS Print Driver












print.






User Guide 417

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




More Information






Saving Jobs using the XPS Print Driver














418 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955













More Information







Sending a Fax using the XPS Print Driver






User Guide 419

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955










Either











Or









420 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




























User Guide 421

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955















More Information





Specifying a Paper Type using the XPS Print Driver







422 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955









• Fit to New Size automatically reduces or enlarges the print image to fit on the size of paper selected from the menu.











More Information







Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4


User Guide 423

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Printing 2-Sided using the XPS Print Driver







for information.

















424 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information





Finishing

Choosing a Finishing Option when using the XPS Print Driver















120 gsm (16 to 32 lb).





User Guide 425

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






More Information




Stapling using the XPS Print Driver














426 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955











More Information





Hole Punching using the XPS Print Driver










User Guide 427

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955














More Information


Choosing a Finishing Option when using the XPS Print Driver




Folding using the XPS Print Driver





428 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






120 gsm (16 to 32 lb).


















User Guide 429

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information






Stapling and Hole Punching using the XPS Print Driver


















430 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955















More Information







Creating a Booklet Layout using the XPS Print Driver





User Guide 431

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



























432 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955







More Information






Folding Booklets using the XPS Print Driver













User Guide 433

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


























434 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information






Folding and Stapling Booklets using the XPS Print Driver




















User Guide 435

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





















More Information






Setting the Print Quality using the XPS Print Driver



436 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



















More Information





Choosing an Output Destination when using the XPS Print Driver


User Guide 437

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955
















• Booklet Maker Tray sends the job to the output bin on the right side of the device.







More Information






438 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


Page Layout

Printing more than one Page on a Sheet using the XPS Print Driver





















User Guide 439

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





More Information






Creating a Booklet Layout using the XPS Print Driver Layout Options













440 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






















More Information





Folding Booklets using the XPS Print Driver Layout Options



User Guide 441

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955
























442 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955














More Information






Folding and Stapling Booklets using the XPS Print Driver Layout Options








User Guide 443

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





























444 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





More Information






Special Pages

Choosing a Special Pages Option using the XPS Print Driver














User Guide 445

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



















More Information







Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4


446 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Adding Covers using the XPS Print Driver



























User Guide 447

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





More Information






Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4



Adding Inserts using the XPS Print Driver











448 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955















More Information






Loading Tray 4

Loading Tray 3



Setting Exceptions using the XPS Print Driver



User Guide 449

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

























450 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information





Designing and Applying a Watermark to Prints using the XPS Print Driver























User Guide 451

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955












More Information





Setting the Orientation of the Print Job using the XPS Print Driver











452 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955










More Information





Advanced

Using the Advanced XPS Print Driver Features




More Information

Accessing the XPS Print Driver Help Pages



Adding a Job ID using the XPS Print Driver

Removing a Job ID using the XPS Print Driver

User Guide 453

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Adding a Job ID using the XPS Print Driver






















454 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information





Removing a Job ID using the XPS Print Driver
















User Guide 455

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




More Information






Using Saved Print Settings using the XPS Print Driver


















456 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955










More Information




Saving Print Settings using the XPS Print Driver

Deleting Saved Print Settings using the XPS Print Driver

Renaming Saved Print Settings using the XPS Print Driver


Saving Print Settings using the XPS Print Driver










User Guide 457

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





custom setting.









More Information




Applying Saved Print Settings using the XPS Print Driver




Saving Print Settings as Application Defaults using the XPS Print Driver





458 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955










More Information




Applying Saved Print Settings using the XPS Print Driver


Applying Saved Print Settings using the XPS Print Driver












User Guide 459

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955










More Information





Saving Print Settings as Application Defaults using the XPS Print Driver




Renaming Saved Print Settings using the XPS Print Driver










460 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




custom setting.









More Information








Deleting Saved Print Settings using the XPS Print Driver





User Guide 461

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








menu.

More Information






Accessing the XPS Print Driver Help Pages










More Information




462 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Resetting Defaults using the XPS Print Driver












More Information




Setting Earth Smart Print Settings using the XPS Print Driver









User Guide 463

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955















Print/PrintingOptions/JobType/Printing a Sample Set Job 0000004087

More Information





Viewing the Device Status using the XPS Print Driver





464 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




















Cancel buttons).


More Information




User Guide 465

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Mac Driver























466 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955









of the job.




More Information












Xerox Features Menu

Paper / Output

Job Type

Using the Job Type Feature with the Mac Print Driver


User Guide 467

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




Set).















468 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955









More Information

Printing a Normal Print Job using the Mac Print Driver


Printing a Delay Print Job using the Mac Print Driver

Printing a Sample Set Job using the Mac Print Driver

Saving Jobs using the Mac Print Driver

Sending a Fax using the Mac Print Driver











Printing a Normal Print Job using the Mac Print Driver







User Guide 469

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955











More Information







Printing a Secure Print Job using the Mac Print Driver





470 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955









passcode.







More Information







Printing a Delay Print Job using the Mac Print Driver



User Guide 471

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








print.








More Information







Printing a Sample Set Job using the Mac Print Driver


472 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955












of the job.








More Information







User Guide 473

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Saving Jobs using the Mac Print Driver













9. If required, select the Print and Save button. If the Save button is selected your job will be saved, but not printed.

10. If required, select the Private button to passcode protect your document.






474 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information







Sending a Fax using the Mac Print Driver













Either





User Guide 475

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




If required, click the Save to Address Book checkbox.



Or

• Click the Add From Address Book button to add a recipient stored in the address book.





If required, select more than one recipient from the Recipients list by clicking the first recipient, pressing and holding the Ctrl button on a PC or the Command button on a

Mac and then clicking each additional recipient. Release the Ctrl or Command button once all recipients have been selected.



• Click the Cover Sheet Notes button.

Click the Cover Sheet Notes entry box and use your keyboard to enter your note.


• Click the Sender Information button.







• Click the Recipient Information button.








476 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

9. If required, select the Cover Sheet Image option required.

• New adds a new image.

• Text adds a text cover page.

• Picture adds an image to the cover page.


10. Select the paper size required from the Cover Sheet Paper Size menu.






• If required, select the Dialing Options entry box and use your keyboard to enter a character that should be dialled before the main fax number.





More Information





Specifying a Paper Type using the Mac Print Driver





User Guide 477

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955










• Transparency Separators... opens the Transparency Separators screen where you can specify both the type and colour of the separators to be added between printed transparencies.



of the job.




More Information







Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4


478 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Printing 2-Sided using the Mac Print Driver






for information.












of the job.




More Information



User Guide 479

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Setting the Print Quality using the Mac Print Driver











• High Resolution prints your document at the highest quality. High Resolution uses more toner than the Toner Saver option.





of the job.




480 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information





Finishing

Choosing a Finishing Option when using the Mac Print Driver


















User Guide 481

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




More Information




Stapling using the Mac Print Driver


















482 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955 of the job.




More Information





Hole Punching using the Mac Print Driver














User Guide 483

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955 area when the print driver opens.



of the job.




More Information


Choosing a Finishing Option when using the Mac Print Driver




Folding using the Mac Print Driver








484 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



















More Information






User Guide 485

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


Folding Booklets using the Mac Print Driver













• Select the Booklet Paper Size option required from the Scale to New Paper Size menu.








486 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





More Information






Folding and Stapling Booklets using the Mac Print Driver














User Guide 487

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

• Select the Booklet Paper Size option required from the Scale to New Paper Size menu.












More Information






Choosing an Output Destination when using the Mac Print Driver






488 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955














of the job.




More Information






Special Pages

Choosing a Special Pages Option using the Mac Print Driver



User Guide 489

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955























490 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




More Information





Adding Covers using the Mac Print Driver


















User Guide 491

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955











More Information






Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4



Adding Inserts using the Mac Print Driver







492 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955
















More Information






Loading Tray 4

Loading Tray 3



User Guide 493

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Setting Exceptions using the Mac Print Driver























494 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information





Image Options

Adjusting the Lightness of your Print using the Mac Print Driver









6. Select the Lightness option required.

• Move the indicator to the left to darken the image.

• Move the indicator to the right to lighten the image.



of the job.



User Guide 495

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information





Adjusting the Contrast of your Print using the Mac Print Driver









6. Select the Contrast option required.

• Move the indicator to the left to increase the contrast. This will produce more vivid blacks and whites for sharper text and lines but less detail in pictures.

• Move the indicator to the right to decrease the contrast. This will produce more detail in light and dark areas of the original.



of the job.



496 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information





Booklet / WaterMark

Creating a Booklet Layout using the Mac Print Driver











7. If required, click the Booklet Options button to specify options such as the paper size, margins, gutter and creep.

• Select the booklet paper size required from the Scale to New Paper Size menu.

• Select Off to create the booklet using the paper size selected in your source document.




User Guide 497

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


9. If required, check the Draw Page Borders checkbox to print a border around each image.







More Information





Folding and Stapling Booklets using the Mac Print Driver











498 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

8. Select Booklet Finishing option required. The folding options vary depending on the type of finisher attached to your device. If there is no finisher attached to your device you will not be able to choose any folding options.

• No Booklet Folding lays out the pages of your document in a booklet format, but does not create a booklet.

• Booklet Fold folds your document into a booklet.

• Booklet Fold and Stapling folds and staples your document.

9. If required, specify options such as the paper size, margins, gutter and creep.

• Select the booklet paper size required from the Scale to New Paper Size menu.

• Select Off to create the booklet using the paper size selected in your source document.






11. If required, check the Draw Page Borders checkbox to print a border around each image.







More Information





Designing and Applying a Watermark to Prints using the Mac Print Driver


User Guide 499

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








Either

• Select the Watermark option required.

Draft provides a standard draft watermark which you can customize.

Confidential generates a standard Confidential watermark which you can then customize to meet your needs.

Copy produces a watermark that identifies the document as a copy. This watermark can be customized.

Or

• Select New... from the Watermark menu.

• Select the option required.


Picture activates the graphic settings. Click the Choose File button to browse to your image. There are options to select the scale and position of your graphic.

8. Select the Layering and Pages options required.










500 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




More Information





Advanced

Adding a Job ID using the Mac Print Driver













User Guide 501

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




of the job.




More Information





Removing a Job ID using the Mac Print Driver










502 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



of the job.




More Information





Changing the Booklet Image Order using the Mac Print Driver




Use the Booklet Image Order option to set the reading order for your booklet depending on whether the booklet opens from left to right, top to bottom, right to left or bottom to top.






User Guide 503

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

6. Select the Booklet Image Order option required.

• Left to Right places page 1 of your document on the front of your booklet when the fold is to the left or top of the booklet.

• Right to Left places page 1 of your document on the front of your booklet when the fold is to the right or bottom of the booklet.


More Information




Creating a Booklet Layout using the Mac Print Driver

Folding and Stapling Booklets using the Mac Print Driver

Using the Advanced Mac Print Driver Features

Advanced options gives you access to advanced printing features. Most of the time you will not need to use these features except, perhaps to turn on or off the Job ID feature.


The advanced features are only likely to be needed by your System Administrator, IT Administrator or Xerox support team.

More Information




Other Options

Accessing the Mac Print Driver Help Pages







504 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955 depending on the application you are printing from. From most applications select the dropdown menu that states Copies and Pages, or that states the application name.

More Information




Viewing the Device Status using the Mac Print Driver





Use the More Status option to see more detailed information including any alerts or warnings, an active jobs list and a completed jobs list.

Note: Your System Administrator must enable Bi-Directional Communication between your device and your print driver before you can use this feature. If you do not see paper tray graphics then Bi-

Directional Communication has not been enabled.














User Guide 505

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

4. Move your mouse over the paper tray status information at the bottom of the print driver screen to see the full status of each tray.

More Information




Setting Earth Smart Print Settings using the Mac Print Driver

















506 User Guide

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




More Information




Printing a Sample Set Job using the Mac Print Driver


Print From





Use Print From Saved Jobs to print jobs which have been saved in a folder on the device using the

Saved Jobs feature.










User Guide 507

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955







15. If the job is a secure job, enter the passcode required and select OK.


More Information






Printing From a Mailbox using the Print From Feature




Use Print From Mailbox to print jobs which have been saved in a folder on the device using the Scan to Mailbox feature.



5. Select the mailbox folder required. If required, use the scroll bar to access the entire list.

6. If you select a private folder you may be prompted to enter a password. Use the numeric keypad to enter the password.

• Select the Enter button.


508 User Guide

Print


WorkCentre

®

5945/5955













More Information

Using the Scan to Mailbox Templates in Workflow Scanning

Creating a Mailbox using Internet Services




Printing From USB using the Print From Feature




Use the Print From... USB feature to print PDF, TIFF, JPEG and other print ready files from your USB

Flash Drive.

A print-ready document is a file that has been formatted and saved for printing from the source program, such as Microsoft Word. To create a print-ready file, select the Print to File option when you print your documents from programs such as Microsoft Word. From advanced publishing programs there may be several methods to create print-ready files.



User Guide 509

Print WorkCentre

®

5945/5955















More Information


Scanning to a USB Memory Stick using the Scan To Feature



510 User Guide

E-Mail

7

Sending an E-mail





Or













User Guide 511

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955














More Information




E-Mail

Sending an E-mail to an Address Book Contact




Use the Address Book option to access previously created addresses.



Or



512 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955 address book your System Administrator has installed or set as the default address book, for example the button may be labelled Device Address Book or Network Address Book.

7. Select the Address Book type from the dropdown menu to the left of the Enter name entry box.

• If required, select the Search button to search the device address book. Use the touchscreen keyboard to enter the recipient details. If you don’t know the full address enter the partial address, then select the Search button.

8. Select the required recipient and select To or CC from the menu.


Note: At least one To address must be selected, documents cannot be sent to a CC address alone.
















More Information




User Guide 513

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Sending an E-mail to a Recipient Saved as a Favorite




Use the Favorites option to quickly access regularly used e-mail addresses. The Favorites are saved in the Address Book.



Or




8. Select the recipient(s).




More Information




Setting the Output Color for an E-mail Attachment




514 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or





















User Guide 515

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955











More Information




Using E-mail to send 2-Sided Originals






Or







516 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955























More Information




User Guide 517

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Setting the Original Type for E-mails






Or















518 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





































User Guide 519

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



More Information




Specifying a File Name for E-mail Attachments






Or










520 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955













14. Select the File Name button.






More Information


Setting a File Format for E-mail Attachments



User Guide 521

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Advanced Settings

Image Options

Choosing the Image Options for E-mails










Or









522 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





















More Information

Lightening or Darkening E-mails

Changing the Sharpness of E-mail Attachments

Changing the Saturation of E-mail Attachments




Lightening or Darkening E-mails




User Guide 523

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or





















524 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955











More Information

Choosing the Image Options for E-mails




Setting the Background Suppression for E-mails



Changing the Sharpness of E-mail Attachments






Or



User Guide 525

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





























526 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

More Information







Changing the Saturation of E-mail Attachments







Or










User Guide 527

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






















More Information







Image Enhancement

Choosing an Image Enhancement Option for E-mails




528 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





Or


















User Guide 529

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955












More Information


Setting the E-mail Contrast




Setting the Background Suppression for E-mails






Or



530 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



























User Guide 531

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information

Choosing an Image Enhancement Option for E-mails

Setting the E-mail Contrast





Setting the E-mail Contrast






Or










532 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955






















More Information

Choosing an Image Enhancement Option for E-mails





Setting the E-mail Scan Presets




User Guide 533

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or





















534 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955















More Information




Specifying the E-mail Scan Resolution






Or



User Guide 535

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




























536 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955








More Information




Setting the Quality or File Size for E-mail Attachments








Or



User Guide 537

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955




























538 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



More Information




Layout Adjustment

Setting the Original Orientation for E-mails






Or








User Guide 539

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





















Document Feeder.


Document Feeder.






More Information




540 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Specifying the Size of the Original to be E-mailed






Or

















User Guide 541

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



















More Information




Erasing Edges from E-mail Attachments



542 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955



Or





















User Guide 543

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955











More Information




Removing Blank Pages from E-mail Originals During Scanning






Or



544 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





























User Guide 545

WorkCentre

®

5945/5955 E-Mail

More Information


Erasing Edges from E-mail Attachments




E-mail Options

Setting a File Format for E-mail Attachments






Or









546 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955














14. Select the E-mail Options tab.


















User Guide 547

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information


Specifying a File Name for E-mail Attachments



Adding a Message to an E-mail




Use the Message option to add a brief message to the file that will be sent.


Or











548 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955













15. Select the Message button.











More Information




Adding a Reply To Address to an E-mail




User Guide 549

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Use the Reply To option to include an e-mail address you want the recipient to reply to. This option is useful if you want the recipient to reply to your e-mail address rather than to the device.


Or






















550 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


15. Select the Reply To button.











More Information




Building an E-mail Job with Multiple Page or Segment Settings








Or


User Guide 551

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955





















15. Select the Job Assembly tab.







552 User Guide

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955







Or

















More Information




User Guide 553

E-Mail WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

554 User Guide

ID Card Copy

8

Making Copies of ID Cards

ID Card Copy enables you to scan each side of an ID card onto one side of a single sheet of paper.

The ID card is placed on the document glass and the first side is scanned. When prompted, the card is turned over and the other side is scanned. You can also set different image quality settings for side 1 and side 2.

If Authentication or Accounting has been enabled on your device you may have to enter login details to access the ID Card Copy features.

1. Lift up the document feeder. Place the ID Card face down onto the document glass and register it to the arrow at the top left rear corner. Close the document feeder.



8. Turn over the ID Card on the document glass when scanning has completed.


10. Press Start to scan the ID Card.

11. Remove the ID Card from the document glass when scanning has completed.


More Information


User Guide 555

ID Card Copy WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Copy Options

Reduce or Enlarge

Reducing or Enlarging Copies of ID Cards








5. Select the Reduce / Enlarge option required.

• Use the + and - buttons to set the exact reduce / enlarge % (or use the numeric keypad to type in the ratio required).

• 100 % will keep your output image the same size as your original. This option is useful if you are programming a complex job and want to cancel any reduce or enlarge settings without cancelling other settings you have made.

• More... gives access to options not listed on the main page.







More Information

Reducing or Enlarging Copies of ID Cards by Proportional %

Reducing or Enlarging Copies of ID Cards by Independent X-Y%


556 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Reducing or Enlarging Copies of ID Cards by Proportional %








• Select the 25-400% entry box and use the numeric keypad or the arrow buttons to enter the ratio required.

• Use the Presets (X-Y%) buttons to select 100% or commonly used ratios which can be set up by your Administrator.








More Information

Reducing or Enlarging Copies of ID Cards by Independent X-Y%


User Guide 557


®

5945/5955

Reducing or Enlarging Copies of ID Cards by Independent X-Y%









• To set a specific ratio, select the Width X% entry box and the Length Y% entry box and use the numeric keypad or the + or - buttons to enter the width and length ratios required.

• To use a pre-defined reduction or enlargement ratio, use the Presets (X / Y%) buttons to select 100 / 100%, Auto Independent X-Y% or commonly used ratios. The selected X and

Y ratios in percentages are shown next to the button. Your System Administrator can alter the preset options.

• 100% / 100% will keep your output image the same size as your original. This option is useful if you are programming a complex job and want to cancel any reduce or enlarge settings without cancelling other settings you have made.








More Information

Reducing or Enlarging Copies of ID Cards by Proportional %


558 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Setting the Paper Supply for ID Card Copying




Use the Paper Supply options to select a specific paper tray for your job.




• Select More... to access the options not listed on the main page.

6. If the paper source you have chosen is not listed on the main screen, select More... to see the additional options.

7. Select the required tray from the list. The chosen tray is highlighted in blue.

Note: If the Auto Tray Switching feature has been enabled by your System Administrator and the same size, color and type of media is loaded in more than one other tray, the device will automatically switch from the active tray to another if media in the active tray runs out.








More Information


User Guide 559


®

5945/5955

Image Quality

Setting the Original Type for ID Card Copying

















More Information

Lightening or Darkening Copies of ID Cards

Setting the Background Suppression for ID Card Copying


560 User Guide


®

5945/5955
















More Information





User Guide 561


®

5945/5955







unwanted background.








More Information




562 User Guide

Internet Services

9

Using Internet Services





Administrator.

4. The Internet Services Welcome Page displays.

More Information

Cloning Device Settings using Internet Services



Choosing Not to Show the Internet Services Welcome Page Again

Tab menu

Status

Welcome

Cloning Device Settings using Internet Services


Use the Cloning option to save your current device settings to a file. This file can be used as a backup and restore file for your device. You can also use a clone file to copy your device settings to other devices. Cloning is a convenient tool to use if you have multiple devices to install with the same configuration. Each device must have the same system software version to support the cloning feature.

Note: This feature is for System Administrator use only.


More Information



User Guide 563

Internet Services WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Configuring the Device in Internet Services


Use the Configure Device button to access the settings you need to configure the device on the network and to enable services.



More Information


Using the Install Later button in Internet Services


The Internet Services Welcome page provides access to settings that are useful when the device is first installed. If you do not want to configure the device now, the Install Later button will take you to the Description & Alerts page where you can see information about the status of the device.




Administrator.

4. If required, click the Status tab. This is usually the active tab when Internet Services opens.

is usually the active page when Internet Services opens. You can change this default.

More Information

Viewing the Device Description and Alerts in Internet Services


Installing Print and Scan Drivers from the Internet Services Welcome Menu


Use the Install Print / Scan Drivers link to access and install the latest print and scan drivers for your device. If you are using a Windows computer, the link will open the drivers in an executable file. An executable file automatically installs software on your computer when you run it. You can choose to run the file to install the drivers now, or save the file to install the drivers later.

The install option provides an easy way to install your print drivers. By default the link goes to

Xerox.com to find the latest drivers for your device. Your System Administrators can change the Install

Print / Scan Drivers link to another location, such as an internal site, if required. They can also hide the link. If you do not see the Install Print / Scan Drivers link check with your System Administrator.

564 User Guide


®

5945/5955








Use the TWAIN Scan Driver to scan documents from the device to your computer. The TWAIN Scan

Driver is installed automatically with the Install Print / Scan Drivers feature.





Administrator.



9. The program will automatically look for your device on the network. If your device does not display, ask your System Administrator for help.

10. Select the driver you want to install.

11. Click the Install button.


13. The program creates the print queue and installs your print driver.

More Information





User Guide 565


®

5945/5955

Choosing Not to Show the Internet Services Welcome Page Again


Use the Status tab on the Welcome page to access to features that are useful when the device is first installed.

Once the device has been installed you may want to select the Don’t Show Welcome Page Again box. This will re-order the Status Menu putting the Description & Alerts page at the top so that it becomes the first page to open rather than the Welcome page. The Welcome page will still be available, but will move to the bottom of the Status menu.




Administrator.



the Welcome page will no longer be the first page displayed.

More Information

Viewing the Device Description and Alerts in Internet Services



Viewing the Device Description and Alerts in Internet Services


Use the Descriptions and Alerts page to see information about the device, including the location and serial number. The page also shows the status of the device and any current faults.

The information displayed may vary depending on the configuration of the device.

• Status information is live and reflects the current status of the device.

• Name is entered by your system Administrator and shows any name assigned to your device.

• Location is entered by your System Administrator and may identify the service room or floor where the device is located.

• Machine Model displays the Xerox model of your device.

• Serial Number displays the serial number of your device.

• IPv4 Address shows the network address of your device.

• IPv6 Address shows the network address of your device, if configured.

• Fax Line gives the fax number for your device, if configured.

566 User Guide


®

5945/5955

The Alerts area displays any current faults and the suggested skill level required to resolve the problem.

• Severity identifies the importance or impact of the problem.

• Status Code is used if the problem needs a Service Representative. Let them know this code when you talk to them.

• Description describes the problem and how to fix it, or gives a warning.

• Skill Level identifies the suggested skill level needed to fix this problem.

• Trained a System Administrator is needed to fix this problem.

• Untrained a normal user can fix this problem.

• Field Service Xerox support is needed to fix this problem.

• Management a network administrator is needed to fix this problem.

• No intervention required means the device is running as expected.




Administrator.


Alerts page will open and display the current device status information.

• If you leave the page open for a while click the Refresh button to display the latest data.

More Information



Viewing the Billing Information in Internet Services


Use the Billing Information page to find the serial number and the total number of impressions made by your device. This page is useful if you need to provide information about the device for billing purposes.

Note: If you need to provide regular billing information for your device you may find the SMart eSolutions feature helpful. SMart eSolutions automatically sends meter readings to Xerox so you don’t have to collect them manually.




Administrator.


User Guide 567


®

5945/5955 will display.


More Information



Viewing the status of SMart eSolutions in Internet Services

Downloading the Usage Counter Data using Internet Services

Opening the Configuration Report in Internet Services


Downloading the Usage Counter Data using Internet Services


Use the Usage Counters page to see the number of impressions copied and printed, and the number of images sent by the device using the fax or scanning features.

You can download a file containing the usage information to your computer. This may be useful if you want to keep a record of how the device is used. When you download the usage file the device creates a .CSV (comma separated values) file. You can open .CSV files in applications such as

Microsoft Excel.




Administrator.


will display.


7. When the File Ready screen appears, use the right-click button on your mouse to select the

DataCollected.csv link.

9. Open the file in an application that supports .CSV files, such as Microsoft Excel.

More Information




568 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Opening the Configuration Report in Internet Services


Use the Configuration Report to view information about your device. Click the links at the top of the screen to go to specific topics, or scroll through the report to the required section. Use the Print

Configuration Page button to print the Configuration Report.

• Common User Data states the machine serial number, system software version and network address information.

• Machine Profile gives information to help with supporting your device, such as the serial number and location. The telephone numbers for customer support and supplies also display if your System Administrator has entered this information.

• Extensible Service Setup identifies the browser version available on your device and is used with the Extensible Services feature. Use Extensible Services to create and add new applications to your device using web-based tools. Further information is available in your System

Administrator Guide.

• Machine Hardware shows the hardware installed on your device, for example, you can see what type of finisher is fitted to your device, and whether have a fax card installed.

• General Setup lists the status of the energy saver mode, Service Plan and SMart eSolutions features.

• Software Versions identifies the version of software installed on your device and the date of the last upgrade.

• Connectivity Physical Connections gives the status of network connectivity for your device.

• Connectivity Protocols shows the status of network protocols enabled on your device.

• Services shows the status and setup of services available on your device.

• Accounting gives the status and setup of the accounting features available on your device.

• Security shows the status and setup of security features available on your device.

• Media Trays identifies the stock loaded in each paper tray.




Administrator.



7. If required, click the Print Configuration Page button to print a copy of the Configuration

Report.

More Information




User Guide 569


®

5945/5955

Viewing the Supplies Status in Internet Services


Use the Supplies section to monitor the status of the components you can replace yourself, without support from a Xerox Support Representative.

• Toner Cartridge

• Print Cartridge

• Fuser Module

• Transfer Roller

The Life Remaining column shows the current supply level as a percentage and provides a bar graph visual display.

The Estimated Pages / Days columns show the estimated number of impressions or days left for each unit.

The Details button shows the date the component was installed and the Xerox Reorder Number.




Administrator.


remaining will display.


Reorder Numbers.

More Information




Viewing the Tray Status in Internet Services


570 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Use the Trays page to display the current paper supply in each tray and the status. A low status warning is given when the tray is nearly empty. The status of the output paper trays is also displayed.




Administrator.


will display.


More Information



Viewing the Information Pages in Internet Services


Use the Information Pages option to access and print the Configuration Report, the Quick Use

Guide, the PCL Font List and PostScript Font List. The Configuration Report provides information about your device, including the serial number, IP Address, device configuration and the software version.




Administrator.


6. Select a document in the list.


of the job.



User Guide 571


®

5945/5955


More Information



SMart eSolutions

Viewing the status of SMart eSolutions in Internet Services


SMart eSolutions includes the Meter Assistant

®

, Supplies Assistant

®

and Maintenance Assistant features.

Note: SMart eSolutions is not available in all countries. Please refer to your Xerox Representative for further information.

Use the Meter Assistant

®

to automatically send meter readings to Xerox. This feature eliminates the need to collect and report meter read information manually. The Meter Assistant

®

page displays the status of the Meter Assistant

®

communication, including the date and time of the last communication with Xerox and the billing meter count sent in the last transmission. Your System

Administrator can set up Meter E-mail alerts to notify users when billing meter reads are sent to

Xerox, or if the feature is cancelled.

Use the Supplies Assistant

®

to automatically order replaceable units for your device. Replaceable units are consumables that you can change without needing the help of a Service Representative.

The Supplies Assistant

®

detects when the replaceable units will soon need changing and sends this information to Xerox so that the replacement units can be sent to you.

Use the Supplies Assistant screen to see the date and time of the last communication with Xerox and the life remaining for each unit.

Use the Maintenance Assistant to provide fault history and usage information to the Xerox support team to help them resolve problems more quickly. Your Xerox support team will let you know when they need you to use the Maintenance Assistant.

Note: This feature must be enabled by your System Administrator.





Administrator.


6. View the Device Communication Status.

572 User Guide


®

5945/5955

More Information



Using the Meter Assistant in Internet Services

Using the Supplies Assistant in Internet Services

Using the Maintenance Assistant in Internet Services


Using the Meter Assistant in Internet Services



®


®



Use the Meter Assistant

®

to automatically send meter readings to Xerox. This feature eliminates the need to collect and report meter read information manually. The Meter Assistant

®

page displays the status of the Meter Assistant

®

communication, including the date and time of the last communication with Xerox and the billing meter count sent in the last transmission. Your System

Administrator can set up Meter E-mail alerts to notify users when billing meter reads are sent to

Xerox, or if the feature is cancelled.






Administrator.


status of Meter E-mail alerts are displayed.

More Information





Using the Supplies Assistant in Internet Services


User Guide 573


®

5945/5955


®


®



Use the Supplies Assistant

®

to automatically order replaceable units for your device. Replaceable units are consumables that you can change without needing the help of a Service Representative.

The Supplies Assistant

®

detects when the replaceable units will soon need changing and sends this information to Xerox so that the replacement units can be sent to you.

Use the Supplies Assistant screen to see the date and time of the last communication with Xerox and the life remaining for each unit.






Administrator.


Remaining is shown.

More Information





Using the Maintenance Assistant in Internet Services



®


®





574 User Guide


®

5945/5955





Administrator.



• Send Diagnostic Information to Xerox sends fault history information from your device to Xerox. The process may take several minutes. When the information has been sent a

Communication Successful page will be displayed.

• Start an Online Troubleshooting Session at www.xerox.com

sends fault history information from your device to Xerox to be immediately analyzed and matched with solutions. This process may take several minutes. When the information has been sent a support page will open.

• Download File to Your Computer create a file which contains fault history and usage information from your device. Use your mouse button to right-click on the UsageLog.csv link and select Save Target As... to save the file to your computer. Your Xerox Service

Representative may ask you to send them the file to help troubleshoot problems on the device.

More Information





Jobs

Active Jobs

Deleting Active Jobs using Internet Services


Use the Active Jobs page to manage your job from the device. You can view current jobs, delete or release jobs, and modify the print settings of jobs held in the device print queue.

Jobs can be held in the Active Jobs list for various reasons, such as, if the job is a Secure Print job waiting for the sender to enter a passcode to release it, or if the device does not have a specific paper type which was selected for the job.

User Guide 575


®

5945/5955

The job information is shown for each job.

• Job Name the title of the print job.

• Owner the person submitting the job.

• Status the current status of the job.

• Type identifies the job category, for example, whether the job is a Sample Set or Secure Print job.

• Copy Count displays the number of copies requested for the job.

Use the Delete option to remove a job from the list. If the job is a Secure Print job you will be able to delete it without System Administrator rights. You can delete other people’s jobs as well as your own jobs. Once a job has been deleted it cannot be retrieved.




Administrator.

6. Select the required job.

9. All jobs other than secure jobs will now be deleted. If you are deleting a secure job enter the passcode then click the Apply button to complete the deletion.

More Information



Submitting a Print Job using Internet Services




Releasing Active Jobs using Internet Services




576 User Guide


®

5945/5955







Use the Release option when you want to send a Sample Set job to print at the device.





Administrator.


More Information







Modifying Active Jobs using Internet Services




User Guide 577


®

5945/5955







Use the Modify option to change the settings in your print job. You can change settings such as the number of copies to print, the paper selection, 2-sided printing, collation, orientation, stapling, folding and output destination. The options will vary depending on the configuration of your device, for example you will not be offered booklet folding if your device has no booklet maker.

Use the print driver to make more advanced selections, not included in the print ready document, such as adding watermarks.




Administrator.


9. Update the printing properties as required.

10. Click the Save button.

More Information





Saved Jobs

Printing Saved Jobs from Internet Services




578 User Guide


®

5945/5955






Administrator.



8. If required, click the Copies entry box and use your keyboard to update the number of copies.

The default number is 1 even if multiple copies were requested when the job was originally saved.






More Information









Deleting Saved Jobs using Internet Services


User Guide 579


®

5945/5955




Use the Delete Job option to remove a job from the saved list. Once a job has been deleted it cannot be retrieved.




Administrator.



More Information







Moving a Saved Job to a Different Folder using Internet Services




Use the Move Job option to transfer a job from one Saved Jobs folder to another, without keeping a copy in the original folder. You need to have more than one Saved Jobs folder to use this feature.




Administrator.

580 User Guide


®

5945/5955


6. Select the required folder from the Folders list on the left side of the screen.



11. Select the Move Job button.

More Information







Copying Saved Jobs using Internet Services




Use the Copy Job option to make a copy of your Saved Job. The copy cannot be saved in the same folder as the original.




Administrator.


6. Select the required folder from the Folders list on the left side of the screen.



11. Select the Copy Job button.

User Guide 581


®

5945/5955

More Information







Creating a New Folder for Saved Jobs in Internet Services





Use the Create New Folder option to make your own folder to save jobs into. New folders are created as public folders. Public folders allow any user to print, copy and delete saved jobs in the folder.

If your System Administrator has enabled the Authentication (Login) feature, you will also be able to create private folders.

Private folders require you to enter a password to access the folder. Your System Administrator can create private folders and read only folders.

Read only folders allow any user to access the folder, but users cannot delete jobs in the folder or change their settings.





Administrator.


6. Select Create New Folder from the Folder Options menu on the left of the page. The New

Folder page will open.

7. Click in the Name entry box and use your keyboard to type in the name for your folder.

More Information


582 User Guide


®

5945/5955





Deleting Saved Jobs Folders using Internet Services





Use the Delete Folders option to remove a Saved Job folder. Folders can be deleted even they contain Saved Jobs. The jobs will be deleted with the folder.





Administrator.


at the top of the heading row.

More Information






Renaming Saved Jobs Folders using Internet Services


User Guide 583


®

5945/5955




Use the Rename Folder option to change the name of a folder. Any jobs saved in the folder will not be affected by the change.




Administrator.


More Information






Changing Saved Job Folder Permissions using Internet Services




Use the Permissions option to specify whether a folder should public or private. Public folders are available to all users. Private folders require you to enter a password to access the folder.

Note: Your System Administrator must enable Authentication (Login Methods) before you can use this feature.




584 User Guide


®

5945/5955


Administrator.


10. Select the Pencil icon Edit button.

11. Select the option required from the Folder Permissions dropdown menu.

• Public Folder allows any user to access the folder and any documents it contains.

• Private allows only the person who created the folder or the device System Administrator to access the folder and its contents.

• Read Only allows any user to access the folder, but users cannot delete jobs in the folder or change their settings.

12. Click the Apply button.

13. Select the Logout link at the top right hand side of the Internet Services screen.


More Information





Print

Submitting a Print Job using Internet Services



Use the Internet Services Job Submission page to send print-ready documents for printing. You can print PDF, PCL, PostScript, TXT, JPEG, TIFF and XPS file formats from the Job Submission page.

Note: You can select general print features, such as 2-sided printing and stapling when you submit your job in Internet Services. If you want to select advanced print features, such as watermarks and booklet layout, you must select these in your print driver before you create your print-ready file.

A print-ready document is a file that has been formatted and saved for printing from the source program, such as Microsoft Word. To create a print-ready file, select the Print to File option when you print your documents from programs such as Microsoft Word. From advanced publishing programs there may be several methods to create print-ready files.


User Guide 585


®

5945/5955





Administrator.

6. Select the file you want to print. Either double-click the file to select it, or click on the file once and then click the Open button. The file name and path will be shown in the File Name box.







More Information








Changing the Output Destination when Printing Using Internet Services

Folding Documents Printed Using Internet Services

Setting the Stapling when Printing Using Internet Services

Setting the Hole Punching when Printing Using Internet Services

Setting the Orientation when Printing Using Internet Services

Using the Collate Options when Printing Using Internet Services

Using the 2-Sided Printing Options when Printing using Internet Services

Changing the Paper Selection when Printing using Internet Services

Sending a Job for Delayed Printing using Internet Services

Saving a Job for Reprinting using Internet Services

Printing a Sample or Proof Print using Internet Services

Sending a Job for Secure Printing using Internet Services

Sending a Job for Normal Printing using Internet Services

Changing the Number of Copies when Printing using Internet Services

586 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Installing Print and Scan Drivers from the Internet Services Print Menu




Xerox.com to find the latest drivers for your device. Your System Administrators can change the

Install Print / Scan Drivers link to another location, such as an internal site, if required. They can also hide the link. If you do not see the Install Print / Scan Drivers link check with your System

Administrator.








Use the TWAIN Scan Driver to scan documents from the device to your computer. The TWAIN Scan

Driver is installed automatically with the Install Print / Scan Drivers feature.





Administrator.



User Guide 587


®

5945/5955




More Information






Changing the Number of Copies when Printing using Internet Services





Use the Copies option to control how many copies of your document are printed. 1-9999 copies can be submitted.

You can select the number of copies in the print driver, or other application, when creating the printready file - or you can select the number of copies within Internet Services. If you set a specific number of copies within Internet Services the number requested within the print-ready file will be overridden by the Internet Services number. For example, if you request 5 copies within your printready file, but request 2 copies within Internet Services you will only receive 2 copies.




Administrator.


7. Select the Copies option required.

• Auto prints the number of copies programmed in the print-ready file.

• (1-9999) prints 1 to 9999 copies of the print-ready file (if the print-ready file contains programming to produce more than 1 copy this is overridden by the number of copies requested in Internet Services). Select the (1-9999) entry box and use your keyboard the enter the number of copies required.

588 User Guide


®

5945/5955






More Information




Job Type

Sending a Job for Normal Printing using Internet Services










Administrator.


User Guide 589


®

5945/5955






More Information





Sending a Job for Secure Printing using Internet Services











Administrator.


590 User Guide


®

5945/5955



passcode.

10. Click the Submit Job button.





More Information






Printing a Sample or Proof Print using Internet Services










Administrator.

User Guide 591


®

5945/5955


7. Select the Copies option required.

• Auto prints the number of copies programmed in the print-ready file.

• (1-9999) prints 1 to 9999 copies of the print-ready file (if the print-ready file contains programming to produce more than 1 copy this is overridden by the number of copies requested in Internet Services). Select the (1-9999) entry box and use your keyboard the enter the number of copies required.










More Information





Saving a Job for Reprinting using Internet Services






592 User Guide


®

5945/5955







Administrator.


8. Select the required option.

• Save stores your job for future use, but will not print a copy.

• Save and Print stores your job and also sends a copy to the device for printing.

9. If required, click in the Job Name entry box and use your keyboard to enter a name for your job. If you do not enter a name the file name will be used as the job name.

10. If required, select the folder your job will be saved in from the Save in Folder menu. If no personal folders have been set up your job will be saved in the Default Public Folder.

11. If required, select click the Secure Saved Job checkbox and enter a 4-10 digit passcode in the

Passcode entry box and the Confirm Passcode entry box.


12. Click the Submit Job button.

13. If required, collect your job from the device.





More Information




User Guide 593


®

5945/5955




Sending a Job for Delayed Printing using Internet Services










Administrator.


print.






594 User Guide


®

5945/5955

More Information



Printing a Delay Print Job using the PostScript Driver



Changing the Paper Selection when Printing using Internet Services











Administrator.


• Loaded Paper displays the paper types already loaded in the device, select the required type from the Loaded Paper window.

• Size lists all the pre-set paper sizes the device can print on. Select the required size from the list.

• Color lists different paper colors. To specify a color select it from the list.

• Type displays the different types of media the device can print on. Select the required type from the list.

User Guide 595


®

5945/5955

• Tray lists the device trays. If you want to print from a specific tray select the tray number from the list. To let the device choose the most appropriate tray, for example if you haven’t loaded your specific media type yet, select Auto.






More Information






Loading Tray 4

Loading Tray 3


Using the 2-Sided Printing Options when Printing using Internet Services








for information.




Administrator.

596 User Guide


®

5945/5955



• Auto uses the settings programmed in the print-ready file.









More Information





Using the Collate Options when Printing Using Internet Services






User Guide 597


®

5945/5955


3,3,3).




Administrator.











More Information





Setting the Orientation when Printing Using Internet Services





598 User Guide


®

5945/5955


Use the Orientation feature to change the direction of the text printed on your page. This feature only works when you submit a text file (.TXT) for printing. Other file types will use the orientation that was selected when the print-ready file was created.




Administrator.


7. Select the Orientation option required.


• Portrait orientates your document so that you can read the text while holding the long edge of the paper.

• Landscape orientates your document so that you can read the text holding the short side of the paper.

• Rotated Portrait orientates your original document by 180 degrees so that you can read the text holding the long side of the paper.

• Rotated Landscape orientates your original document by 180 degrees so that you can read the text holding the short side of the paper.






More Information





Setting the Stapling when Printing Using Internet Services


User Guide 599


®

5945/5955






Note: Booklet stapling is selected in the Folding section.




Administrator.


7. Select the Staple option required. The options vary depending on the type of finisher attached to your device.


• No Staple switches off stapling.








More Information



Folding using the PostScript Print Driver

Folding Documents Printed Using Internet Services


600 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Setting the Hole Punching when Printing Using Internet Services












Administrator.


7. Select the Hole Punch option required. The options vary depending on the type of finisher attached to your device.


• No Punch switches off hole punching.

• Punch On switches on hole punching.






User Guide 601


®

5945/5955

More Information




Folding Documents Printed Using Internet Services










Administrator.


7. Select the Folding option required. The options vary depending on the type of finisher attached to your device.


• No Fold switches off folding.




602 User Guide


®

5945/5955


• Bi Fold Multiple Sheets and Staple folds the output in the middle of each page and adds

2 staples to the fold. If the pages are single sided the printed content will be on the inside of the fold. If the pages are double sided, page 1 will be on the inside.






More Information





Changing the Output Destination when Printing Using Internet Services










Administrator.

User Guide 603


®

5945/5955





• Main Tray sends the job to the output tray on the right side of the device.







More Information





Scan

Templates

Creating a New Template in Internet Services



Templates and mailboxes cannot be created using the device user interface, they must be created or modified using the Scan page within Internet Services.





604 User Guide


®

5945/5955

To create a template you will need to know some technical information about your network. If you are not technically-minded, you will find it easier to copy an existing template and then modify it rather than create a new one. If possible, ask your System Administrator to create a new template for you.

Note: Your System Administrator must configure a scan destination (known as a file repository) before you can create a template or add a destination to a template.





Administrator.

Administrator has not set up any Mailboxes you will not see the Display menu and will be sent directly to the Templates page.

7. Click in the Template Name entry box and use your keyboard to enter a name for your template.

8. Click in the Template Description entry box and use your keyboard to enter a description.

10. Enter a scan destination.

Either

• Select the Enter a Scan Destination radio button.

• Click in the Friendly Name entry box and use your keyboard to enter a name for your template. The Friendly Name displays in the template description area of the Workflow

Scanning screen on the device control panel. If you don’t specify a display order, templates display alphabetically by Friendly Name.

Or

• Select the Select from a predefined list radio button.

• Select the destination required from the File Destination menu.

11. Select the Protocol you want to use to scan your documents. The protocol depends on the location of your file repository. Refer to the System Administrator Guide for further information about setting up a file repository.

• FTP scans to a computer using File Transfer Protocol. Select this option if you have an FTP application on your computer.

• SFTP scans to a computer using Secure File Transfer Protocol. Select this option if you have an SFTP application running on your computer.

• SMB scans to a computer using Server Message Block protocol. Select this option to scan to a Windows computer. Select SMB if you are unsure which protocol to select.

• HTTP scans to a computer using Hyper Text Transfer Protocol. Select this option to scan to a web server using HTTP.

• HTTPS scans to a computer using Hyper Text Transfer Protocol via Secure Sockets Layer

(SSL). Select this option to scan to a web server using HTTPS.

User Guide 605


®

5945/5955

• Netware scans to a computer using the Netware protocol. Select this option if you are using Netware. This option is only available if Netware is enabled on your device.

12. Select the Name or IP Address option required and enter the appropriate details into the IP

Address: Port box(es).

13. If required, click the IP Address entry box and use your keyboard to enter the address of your scan destination.

14. If you selected SMB for the Protocol, click the Share entry box and use your keyboard to enter the name of the shared folder.

15. Click the Document Path entry box and use your keyboard to enter your scan destination.

16. If required, check the Sub-folder (.XSM) for 1 File Per Page, File Format jobs checkbox. This will allow you to create sub folders when you scan a document. The sub folder is created in your scan destination folder and contains the files created by the machine when you scan a document.

17. Select the Filing Policy option required.

• Rename New File saves your scanned image as a new file. If you scan a document with the same name as one that already exists in your file repository, the device adds the date and time of the scan to create a new file name.

• Append to Existing File adds your scanned image to the file that already exists with the same name.



• Add Date to Name adds the current date to the end of the file name.

18. Select the Login Credentials to Access the Destination option required. The Login Credentials are the user name and password required to access the scan destination.

• Authenticated User and Domain is used if the user name and domain are authenticated by your LDAP server.

• Logged-in User is used if the user name is authenticated by your LDAP server.

• Prompt at User Interface prompts each user to enter authentication details at the device

Control Panel.

• Stored in Template is used if the user name and password are going to be typed in on this page and stored in the memory of the device.

19. If you selected Stored in Template from the Login Credentials to Access the Destination menu, click the Login Name entry box and use your keyboard to enter the user name.

• Click the Password entry box and use your keyboard to enter the password required. Enter the password again the password in the Retype Password entry box.

• Click the Save button to save the password and user name.

20. If required, check the Enable checkbox in the Save Job Log (.XST) in Repository section to save information about the scanned image file into the scan destination folder.

21. Click the Add button to save your template.

More Information



Copying a Template in Internet Services




606 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Templates

Deleting a Template in Internet Services






Use the Delete template option to permanently remove a template from the device.





Administrator.

5. Select the template required from the Templates list.

More Information





Copying a Template in Internet Services





User Guide 607


®

5945/5955


Use the Copy template option to copy an existing template. When you copy a template all the image settings and destinations are copied to create a new template, which saves you time if you want to use the same or similar settings.





Administrator.


7. Click in the Template Name entry box and use your keyboard to enter a name for your template.

8. Click in the Template Description entry box and use your keyboard to enter a description.


More Information






Changing a Template Description or Owner in Internet Services






Use the Description and Owner options when you want to enter or change information about how your template is used and who controls it.

608 User Guide


®

5945/5955





Administrator.


6. If required, click the Description link.

• Click in the Template Description entry box and use your keyboard to enter a description.

7. If required, click the Owner link.

• Click the Owner entry box and use your keyboard to enter an owner name for the template.

More Information






Controlling the Template Display Order using Internet Services





Use the Refer to Display Settings option to access template controls that specify the order templates should be listed in on the device touch screen. If you do not specify an order the templates will be listed alphabetically by template Friendly Name.



More Information





User Guide 609


®

5945/5955

Modifying a Template using Internet Services






Use the Modify template option to change the settings of an existing template. You can change the filing destination, image options, filing options and add document management fields.





Administrator.


6. Select the Destination Services option required.

• Check the File checkbox to scan to a specific folder location when you use this template.

• Check the Fax checkbox to send your document to a specific fax number when you use this template. You must have a fax service enabled on your device to use this feature.

• Add creates a new destination for your scanned images.

• Edit changes the current filing destination. If you select this option, make your changes and select Save.

• Delete erases the current filing destination. Click the OK button to confirm the deletion.

8. If you selected the Fax option in the Services area, update the Fax Destination information as required.

• Select the Add button.

• Select the Add Fax Number entry field and use your keyboard to enter the fax number.

• Click the Add button. The fax number displays in the Fax Distribution List field.

• Select the Delivery option required.

Immediate sends your fax document without any delay.

Delayed send specifies a time to send your fax.

• Click the Apply button.

610 User Guide


®

5945/5955

9. If required, update the Document Management Fields information. The Document

Management Fields allow you to enter additional data when you scan a document at the device. The data is filed with your scanned documents in a job log. The job log can be accessed by third party software for various purposes.

• Select the Add button.

• Select the Field Name entry box and use your keyboard to enter a field name. The name should match the name used by your Document Management software to process the field. This information is not displayed on the control panel.

• Select the editing option required.

Select the Editable radio button if you want to allow the user to change the value for the document management field.

Select the Field Label entry box and use your keyboard to enter a name that identifies the purpose of the field to the user at the machine.

If you want to ensure the template user enters information for this field, select the

Require User Input checkbox. If you select this option you will not be able to set a Default Value for this field.

If you want to ensure the information that the user enters at the machine is hidden by asterisks to retain confidentiality, select the Mask User Input

checkbox.

If you want to save the information entered by the user in the machine’s job log select the Record User Input to Job Log checkbox.

Select the Not Editable radio button if you want to prevent users altering the default value for the field.

Select the Default Value entry box and use your keyboard to enter the information that will automatically be used or suggested.

The Validate Data Before Scanning option may be available if your System

Administrator has enabled validation servers for this device. This option allows the server to verify that the information a user enters in the document management field meets the requirements of the third party software. Check with your System

Administrator if you are unsure.


• If required, select the Add button to create another Document Management Field.

10. Select the Workflow Scanning options required. This area allows you to change the basic scanning options.

• Select the Edit button.

• Select the Output Color option required.

Auto Detect allows the device to select the most appropriate color setting.

Color produces full color output.

Black and White produces black and white output even if the originals were color.

Grayscale produces output using various shades of gray.

• Select the 2-Sided Scanning option required.

1-Sided use this option if your originals are printed on 1 side.

2-Sided use this option if your originals are 2-sided. The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option.

2-Sided, Rotate Side 2 use this option if your originals are 2-sided and open up like a calendar. The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option.

• Select the Original Type option required.

Photo and Text produces high quality pictures but slightly reduces the sharpness of text and line art. This setting is recommended for originals containing high quality photographs or line art and text.

Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art.

User Guide 611


®

5945/5955

Photo gives the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art. It is the best option for originals containing photos or continuous tones without any text or line art.


• Select the Scan Presets option required.

Sharing and Printing produces a medium sized file, small enough to share but high enough quality to print.

OCR produces a high quality, large file with OCR (Optical Character Recognition) enabled. This file is fully searchable.

Archival Record produces a small, lower quality file suitable for viewing on a screen, but the print quality will be poor.

High Quality Printing produces a large, high quality file.

Simple Scan produces a basic scanned file, no advanced settings are selected.

• Select the Document Name entry box and use your keyboard to enter a default name that will be applied to each scanned document. You can also enter codes to create a name that is generated automatically, for example, the code %D will add the date to your document name to help you identify the document more easily. The table below the

Document Name field lists the codes you can add.


11. Select the Advanced Settings options required. This area allows you to change the image quality settings for your scanned documents.


• Select the Lighten / Darken option required.

Move the indicator right to darken the scanned image. If this creates an output with too dark a background, use the Background Suppression feature to remove the background.

Move the indicator left to lighten the scanned image.

• Select the Sharpness option required.

Move the indicator right to sharpen the scanned image. Text images are more likely to be improved by sharpening than photo images.

Move the indicator left to soften the scanned image. This is particularly useful when scanning photos.

• Select Auto Suppression from the Background Suppression menu to automatically suppress unwanted background.

• If required, select No Suppression to turn the Background Suppression feature off. The No

Suppression option is particularly useful when the Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals, the original has a gray or colored border, such as a certificate, or you want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals.

• Select the Resolution option required.

72 dpi produces the smallest file size and is recommended for output displayed on a computer.

100 dpi delivers low image quality and is recommended for low quality text documents. This setting should ideally be used for output displayed on a computer rather than printed.

150 dpi produce average quality text and low image quality for photos and graphics, this resolution is recommended for average quality text documents and line art.

200 dpi produces average quality text and low quality photos and graphics. This resolution is recommended for average quality text documents and line art.

612 User Guide


®

5945/5955

300 dpi produces higher quality output. This setting is recommended for high quality text documents that are to pass through OCR (Optical Character Recognition) applications. It is also recommended for high quality line art or medium quality photos and graphics. This is the best default resolution choice in most cases.

400 dpi produces average image quality for photos and graphics and is recommended for photos and graphics.

600 dpi produces the largest image file size, but delivers the best image quality. This setting is recommended for high quality photos and graphics.

• Select the Quality / File Size option required.

Move the indicator towards Normal Quality / Small File Size for a smaller file and lower quality image. This produces small files by using advanced compression techniques.

Image quality is acceptable but some quality degradation and character substitution errors may occur with some originals.

Move the indicator towards the middle of the scale to produce better image quality and larger files, but not the highest quality or largest files.

Move the indicator towards Highest Quality / Largest File Size to produce the largest files with the maximum image quality. Large files are not ideal for sharing and transmitting over a network.


12. Select the Layout Adjustment options required. This area allows you to change the page settings for your scanned documents.


• Select the Original Orientation option required.

Upright Images the images on the originals are loaded in a upright orientation in the

Document Feeder.

Sideways Images the images on the originals are loaded in a sideways orientation in the Document Feeder.



• Manual Size Input defines the size of your original from a list of preset, standard original sizes. It also includes a Custom option which sets a specific area for scanning and is useful for scanning receipts. Measure the width (X) and height (Y) of the original to be scanned and enter the X and Y measurements into the fields provided.


• Select the Edge Erase option required.

Border Erase erases an equal amount from all the edges. Use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount to be erased from 0 mm (0”) to 50 mm (2.0”) or select the entry field and use your keyboard to enter the amount required.

Edge Erase enables a different amount to be erased from each of the edges, on both the first and second sides. Use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount to be erased from 0mm (0”) to 50mm (2.0”) or select the appropriate entry field and use your keyboard to enter the amount required.

Scan to Edge cancels any edge erase settings so that no edge deletion takes place.

• Select the Blank Page Management option required.

• Include Blank Pages scans any empty pages in your document and includes them in the scanned file. This is useful if you intend to print your scanned file and want to keep the original page layout.

• Remove Blank Pages ignores any blank pages and does not include them in the scanned file. This results in a smaller file size.

User Guide 613


®

5945/5955


13. Select the Filing Options required. This area allows you to specify the file format for your scanned images.


• Select the type of file required.







• Select the page option required.



• Select the Image Only search setting required.




14. Select the Job Assembly option required.


• Check the Build Job checkbox to enable the Build Job option for users. Leave the checkbox unchecked to prevent people using this option.


15. Select the Filename Extension option required.


• Check the Lower Case radio button to display file extensions in lower case characters, such as .pdf. Or check the Upper Case radio button to display the extensions as capital letters, such as .PDF.



16. Select the Report options required.


• Check the Confirmation Sheet checkbox to have the device print a confirmation sheet when a job has been completed successfully. Leave the box empty to disable the confirmation sheet option.

• Check the Save Job Log (.XST) in Repository checkbox to create a report with information about your scan job. The report is filed in the same place as your scanned image.


614 User Guide


®

5945/5955

17. Select the Workflow Scanning Image Settings options required. This area allows you create compressed image files for faster web viewing and also to select searchable options.


• Check the Optimized for Fast Web Viewing checkbox if you want to create PDF files for use on the internet. Viewers will be able to see the file more quickly than a PDF that is not optimized for fast viewing.

• Select the Searchable Options choice required.

Image Only produces a file that is not searchable.

Searchable results in a file that can be searched.

Use Language Displayed on the Device User Interface indexes the file for searching using the same language shown on the device touch screen.

Use this Language activates a dropdown menu listing all the languages available to index your file for searches.

• Select the Text Compression Setting option required. This option only applies to PDF and

PDF/A files.

• Disabled turns off the compression option.

• Enabled (Flate Compression) reduces the file size of scanned jobs.


18. Select the Compression Capability options required. This area allows you set the compression type used each time you scan a document using this template.


• Select the option(s) required.


More Information






Adding a Destination to a Template using Internet Services






Use the File Destination options to add pre-configured scan destinations to your template. You can set up a template to scan to more than one file destination.


Note: Your System Administrator must configure a scan destination (known as a file repository) before you can create a template or add a destination to a template.

User Guide 615


®

5945/5955

The steps below will help you complete the basic version of this process, which is all most people require. If you have more specific requirements you’ll see that the destination settings can be customized in many different ways.





Administrator.

Administrator has not set up any Mailboxes you will not see the Display menu and will be sent directly to the Templates page.


7. In the File Destinations area, select the Add button.

9. If your System Administrator has created more than one destination, select the required option from the File Destination list.

Note: Contact your System Administrator if you do not know the address of your scan destination.

10. Select the Filing Policy option required.

• Rename New File saves your scanned image as a new file. If you scan a document with the same name as one that already exists in your file repository, the device adds the date and time of the scan to create a new file name.



• Add Date to Name adds the current date to the end of the file name.

11. If required, check the Enable checkbox in the Save Job Log (.XST) in Repository section to save information about the scanned image file into the scan destination folder.


13. When you have finished modifying your template, it is ready to use to scan a document. At the device, select the Workflow Scanning feature and select your template in the Templates list.

More Information






616 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Mailboxes

Creating a Mailbox using Internet Services


Templates and mailboxes cannot be created using the device user interface, they must be created or modified using the Scan page within Internet Services.










Administrator.

you want to set for your mailbox.

• Select the Confirm Folder Password entry box and use your keyboard to enter the password.

More Information





User Guide 617


®

5945/5955

Downloading Documents from your Mailbox using Internet Services







Use the Download option to save documents in your mailbox onto your computer.





Administrator.

6. Select your folder in the Scan to Mailbox list.

7. If you select a private folder you may be prompted to enter a password. Select the Folder

Password entry box and use your keyboard to enter the password.


More Information





Printing Documents from your Mailbox using Internet Services


618 User Guide


®

5945/5955






Use the Reprint option to print documents in your mailbox at the device.





Administrator.





More Information





Deleting Documents from your Mailbox using Internet Services



User Guide 619


®

5945/5955





Use the Delete options to delete documents held in a mailbox. You can delete all the documents at once, or select specific documents for deletion.





Administrator.





documents, or select the Delete All button to delete all the documents in the mailbox.


More Information





Modifying Mailbox Template Settings using Internet Services



620 User Guide


®

5945/5955




Use the Personalize Settings option to configure your Scan to Mailbox template with specific settings which are used each time you select the template. You can configure settings such as image quality, file format and layout adjustment. Configuring settings for your template is useful if you use the same or similar settings each time you scan a document to your mailbox.






Administrator.

6. Select the folder that you want to modify from the list from the Scan to Mailbox menu.




9. Select the Workflow Scanning options required. This area allows you to change the basic scanning options.


• Select the Output Color option required.

Auto Detect allows the device to select the most appropriate color setting.

Color produces full color output.

Black and White produces black and white output even if the originals were color.

Grayscale produces output using various shades of gray.

• Select the 2-Sided Scanning option required.

1-Sided use this option if your originals are printed on 1 side.

2-Sided use this option if your originals are 2-sided. The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option.

2-Sided, Rotate Side 2 use this option if your originals are 2-sided and open up like a calendar. The document feeder must be used to scan your originals with this option.

User Guide 621


®

5945/5955

• Select the Original Type option required.

Photo and Text produces high quality pictures but slightly reduces the sharpness of text and line art. This setting is recommended for originals containing high quality photographs or line art and text.

Photo gives the best quality for photos but reduced quality text and line art. It is the best option for originals containing photos or continuous tones without any text or line art.

Text produces sharper edges and is recommended for text and line art.


Map is used if your original is a map.

Newspaper / Magazine is used if your original is from a magazine or newspaper that contains photographs or text.

• Select the Scan Presets option required.

Sharing and Printing produces a medium sized file, small enough to share but high enough quality to print.

OCR produces a high quality, large file with OCR (Optical Character Recognition) enabled. This file is fully searchable.

Archival Record produces a small, lower quality file suitable for viewing on a screen, but the print quality will be poor.

High Quality Printing produces a large, high quality file.

Simple Scan produces a basic scanned file, no advanced settings are selected.

• Select the Document Name entry box and use your keyboard to enter a default name that will be applied to each scanned document. You can also enter codes to create a name that is generated automatically, for example, the code %D will add the date to your document name to help you identify the document more easily. The table below the

Document Name field lists the codes you can add.


10. Select the Advanced Settings options required. This area allows you to change the image quality settings for your scanned documents.


• Select the Lighten / Darken option required.

Move the indicator right to darken the scanned image. If this creates an output with too dark a background, use the Background Suppression feature to remove the background.

Move the indicator left to lighten the scanned image.

• Select the Sharpness option required.

Move the indicator right to sharpen the scanned image. Text images are more likely to be improved by sharpening than photo images.

Move the indicator left to soften the scanned image. This is particularly useful when scanning photos.

• Select Auto Suppression from the Background Suppression menu to automatically suppress unwanted background.

• If required, select No Suppression to turn the Background Suppression feature off. The No

Suppression option is particularly useful when the Darken adjustment does not produce a satisfactory output from light originals, the original has a gray or colored border, such as a certificate, or you want to bring out fine detail that was lost due to a dark edge when using bound originals.

622 User Guide


®

5945/5955

• Select the Resolution option required.

72 dpi produces the smallest file size and is recommended for output displayed on a computer.

100 dpi delivers low image quality and is recommended for low quality text documents. This setting should ideally be used for output displayed on a computer rather than printed.

150 dpi produce average quality text and low image quality for photos and graphics, this resolution is recommended for average quality text documents and line art.

200 dpi produces average quality text and low quality photos and graphics. This resolution is recommended for average quality text documents and line art.

300 dpi produces higher quality output. This setting is recommended for high quality text documents that are to pass through OCR (Optical Character Recognition) applications. It is also recommended for high quality line art or medium quality photos and graphics. This is the best default resolution choice in most cases.

400 dpi produces average image quality for photos and graphics and is recommended for photos and graphics.

600 dpi produces the largest image file size, but delivers the best image quality. This setting is recommended for high quality photos and graphics.

• Select the Quality / File Size option required.

Move the indicator towards Normal Quality / Small File Size for a smaller file and lower quality image. This produces small files by using advanced compression techniques.

Image quality is acceptable but some quality degradation and character substitution errors may occur with some originals.

Move the indicator towards the middle of the scale to produce better image quality and larger files, but not the highest quality or largest files.

Move the indicator towards Highest Quality / Largest File Size to produce the largest files with the maximum image quality. Large files are not ideal for sharing and transmitting over a network.


11. Select the Layout Adjustment options required. This area allows you to change the page settings for your scanned documents.


• Select the Original Orientation option required.

Upright Images the images on the originals are loaded in a upright orientation in the

Document Feeder.

Sideways Images the images on the originals are loaded in a sideways orientation in the Document Feeder.

Portrait Originals the images on the originals are in a LEF orientation.

Landscape Originals the images on the originals are in a SEF orientation.



• Manual Size Input defines the size of your original from a list of preset, standard original sizes. It also includes a Custom option which sets a specific area for scanning and is useful for scanning receipts. Measure the width (X) and height (Y) of the original to be scanned and enter the X and Y measurements into the fields provided.


User Guide 623


®

5945/5955

• Select the Edge Erase option required.

Border Erase erases an equal amount from all the edges. Use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount to be erased from 0 mm (0”) to 50 mm (2.0”) or select the entry field and use your keyboard to enter the amount required.

Edge Erase enables a different amount to be erased from each of the edges, on both the first and second sides. Use the arrow buttons to adjust the amount to be erased from 0mm (0”) to 50mm (2.0”) or select the appropriate entry field and use your keyboard to enter the amount required.

Scan to Edge cancels any edge erase settings so that no edge deletion takes place.

• Select the Blank Page Management option required.

• Include Blank Pages scans any empty pages in your document and includes them in the scanned file. This is useful if you intend to print your scanned file and want to keep the original page layout.

• Remove Blank Pages ignores any blank pages and does not include them in the scanned file. This results in a smaller file size.


12. Select the Filing Options required. This area allows you to specify the file format for your scanned images.


• Select the type of file required.







• Select the page option required.



• Select the Image Only search setting required.




13. Select the Job Assembly option required.


• Check the Build Job checkbox to enable the Build Job option for users. Leave the checkbox unchecked to prevent people using this option.


14. Select the Filename Extension option required.


• Check the Lower Case radio button to display file extensions in lower case characters, such as .pdf. Or check the Upper Case radio button to display the extensions as capital letters, such as .PDF.

624 User Guide


®

5945/5955

• Select the Save button.

15. Select the Report options required.


• Check the Confirmation Sheet checkbox to have the device print a confirmation sheet when a job has been completed successfully. Leave the box empty to disable the confirmation sheet option.

• Check the Save Job Log (.XST) in Repository checkbox to create a report with information about your scan job. The report is filed in the same place as your scanned image.


16. Select the Workflow Scanning Image Settings options required. This area allows you create compressed image files for faster web viewing and also to select searchable options.


• Check the Optimized for Fast Web Viewing checkbox if you want to create PDF files for use on the internet. Viewers will be able to see the file more quickly than a PDF that is not optimized for fast viewing.

• Select the Searchable Options choice required.

Image Only produces a file that is not searchable.

Searchable results in a file that can be searched.

Use Language Displayed on the Device User Interface indexes the file for searching using the same language shown on the device touch screen.

Use this Language activates a dropdown menu listing all the languages available to index your file for searches.

• Select the Text Compression Setting option required. This option only applies to PDF and

PDF/A files.

• Disabled turns off the compression option.

• Enabled (Flate Compression) reduces the file size of scanned jobs.


17. Select the Compression Capability options required. This area allows you set the compression type used each time you scan a document using this template.


• Select the option(s) required.


18. When you have finished modifying your template, it is ready to use to scan a document. At the device, select the Workflow Scanning feature and select your template in the Templates list.

More Information





Changing a Mailbox Password using Internet Services



User Guide 625


®

5945/5955




Use the Modify Folder option to change your mailbox password.






Administrator.





10. Select the Change Folder Password entry box and use your keyboard to enter the password.

11. Select the Confirm Folder Password entry box and use your keyboard to enter the password.

12. Click the Save Password button.

More Information





Deleting a Mailbox using Internet Services



626 User Guide


®

5945/5955




Use the Modify Folder option to change your mailbox password.






Administrator.






More Information





User Guide 627


®

5945/5955

Address Book

Creating an E-mail Address using Internet Services



Use the Address Book tab to create and manage the Device Address Book. You can add E-mail, Fax,

Internet Fax and Scan To Destination addresses to the Device Address Book. You can then access these address when you use the E-mail, Fax, Internet Fax and Scan To services at the device.


Use the Favorites option to save an address as a favorite. Favorites are useful if you regularly send information to the same address.





Administrator.

6. If required, select the First Name and Last Name entry boxes and use your keyboard to enter a name to identify your address.

7. If required, click in the Company entry box and use your keyboard to enter a name to identify your address. address. The Display Name will appear when you select the Address Book at the device.

9. If required, select the Global Favorite button to make the address available in the Favorites list when you use the E-mail, Fax, Internet Fax or Scan To services at the device.

10. In the E-mail entry box enter the e-mail address.

11. Select the E-mail Favorite button if you want this address to be available in the Favorites list when you use E-mail service at the device. If you have selected this address as a Global Favorite it is already available as an E-mail favorite.

12. Select the Save button.

13. The address displays in the Address Book list. If you selected the address as a Favorite it will also display in the Favorites list.

More Information

Sending an E-mail




628 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Creating a Fax Address using Internet Services











Administrator.




10. Click in the Fax entry box and use your keyboard to enter the fax number. Click the Show

Dialling Characters checkbox if you want to see the dialling characters you can add to your fax number.

11. Select the Fax Favorite button if you want this address to be available in the Favorites list when you use Fax service at the device. If you have selected this address as a Global Favorite it is already available as an Fax favorite.



More Information

Sending a Fax (Embedded Fax)




User Guide 629


®

5945/5955

Creating a Scan To Address using Internet Services














Administrator.

address. The Display Name will appear when you select the Address Book at the device.


8. In the Scan To Destination area, select the Add Destination button.

9. Click in the Nickname entry box and use your keyboard to enter a name for your Scan To destination. The Nickname displays in the Address Book or Favourites area within the Scan To screen on the device control panel.

10. Select the Scan To Favorite button if you want this address to be available in the Favorites list when you use Scan To service at the device. If you have selected this address as a Global

Favorite it is already available as a Scan To favorite.

11. Select the Protocol you want to use to scan your documents. The protocol depends on the location of your scan destination.

• FTP scans to a computer using File Transfer Protocol. Select this option if you have an FTP application on your computer.

• SFTP scans to a computer using Secure File Transfer Protocol. Select this option if you have an SFTP application running on your computer.

• Netware scans to a computer using the Netware protocol. Select this option if you are using Netware.

630 User Guide


®

5945/5955

• SMB scans to a computer using Server Message Block protocol. Select this option to scan to a Windows computer.

12. Select the required Address Type and enter the host name or address of your scan destination.

13. If you selected SMB for the Protocol, click the Share entry box and use your keyboard to enter the name of the shared folder.

14. Click the Document Path entry box and use your keyboard to enter your scan destination.

15. Click in the Login Name entry box and use your keyboard to enter the user name required to access your scan destination.

• Click Password and enter the password required to access your scan destination. Enter the password again the password in Retype Password.

• Click Select to save new password to save the password and user name.



More Information





Creating an Internet Fax Address using Internet Services













Administrator.

User Guide 631


®

5945/5955




10. Click in the Internet Fax entry box and use your keyboard to enter the required internet fax address.

11. Select the Internet Fax Favorite button if you want this address to be available in the Favorites list when you use Internet Fax service at the device. If you have selected this address as a Global

Favorite it is already available as an Internet Fax favorite.



More Information





Using the Properties page in Internet Services


The Properties page allows System Administrators to set up features on the device, such as network connectivity, accounting or login permissions, services and options.

Your System Administrator may choose to make this page visible and editable for all users - you should not attempt to use this page unless you are an advanced user with a System Administrator skill level.



More Information



632 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Support

General

Assistance Links

Linking to the Latest Xerox Software Solutions from Internet Services



Use the Xerox.com link to open a Xerox web site where you can find information about the latest software solutions available to support your device.

At the time this was written the solutions included tools to increase response rates from marketing campaigns by using variable data, and Xerox PrintBack - a personal printing solution for your iPhone, iPod, iPad or Android-based smartphone or device.




Administrator.

5. If required, click the General tab. This is usually the active tab when the Support page opens.

More Information




Installing Print and Scan Drivers from the Internet Services Support Menu




Xerox.com to find the latest drivers for your device. Your System Administrators can change the

Install Print / Scan Drivers link to another location, such as an internal site, if required. They can also hide the link. If you do not see the Install Print / Scan Drivers link check with your System

Administrator.

User Guide 633


®

5945/5955











Administrator.






More Information






Linking to Browser Software from Internet Services



634 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Use the Browser Software links to access and download browser software that supports Internet

Services. You should be able to view Internet Services with most web browsers, but if you find that certain pages do not display correctly, you can download and use one of the browsers recommended on the Support page.




Administrator.


6. Click the link for your chosen browser from the Browser Software section. The browser page opens in a new window. Follow the instructions on the browser page to download the software.

More Information




Using Internet Services to find System Administrator Contact Details


When your System Administrator set your device up on the network they had the opportunity to add their details to the Internet Services Support page. If your System Administrator added their details you can use the Support page to find their name, phone number and location.




Administrator.


6. The System Administrator details display in the System Administrator section, if they have been entered.

More Information



User Guide 635


®

5945/5955

Xerox Support

Using Internet Services to find Contact Details for Xerox Support



Use the Xerox Support area of the Internet Services Support page to find the contact details for customer support, service and supplies if you need assistance with your device. Xerox Support contact details are entered by your System Administrator. Some System Administrators choose not to add these details, for example they may not give you the supplies number if they have set up an automatic supplies ordering system.




Administrator.


6. The Xerox Support area displays the contact details if they have been added. You can also find information and support at www.xerox.com

.

More Information




Sending Diagnostic Information to Xerox using Internet Services









Administrator.

636 User Guide


®

5945/5955


minutes. When the information has been sent a Communication Successful page will be displayed. Your Xerox support team will advise you of the next steps.

More Information




Starting an Online Troubleshooting Session with Xerox Using Internet Services









Administrator.


the www.xerox.com

button. When your machine’s diagnostic information has been matched with solutions a support page will open.

Your Xerox Support team will advise you of the next steps.

More Information





Editing Support Settings Using Internet Services


User Guide 637


®

5945/5955

Your System Administrator can use the Edit Settings button to enter contact details for device support in your organisation, and the contact details for the Xerox Support service.



More Information



Changing the Billing Impression Mode in Internet Services



Use the Billing Impression Mode option to change the billing plan for your device. There are 2 billing impression modes which define how the device tracks images made on large-sized paper such as

A3 or tabloid. The images can either be tracked as one large image or multiple smaller images.

You should only use this feature if advised to do so by your Xerox Representative.

Before you begin

You will need information from your Xerox Representative.

• The PIN.

• Information on which option to select from the Impression Mode menu.




Administrator.

6. Click in the PIN entry box and use your keyboard to type in your PIN.

7. Select the option your Xerox Representative advised you to select from the Impression Mode menu.

More Information



Changing the Billing Impression Mode using the Tools Menu


638 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Using the Remote Control Panel from Internet Services



Use the Remote Control Panel to open and view the device touch screen from your computer. You can use the Remote Control Panel to see the status of jobs in the queue, services available on your device or to change settings in the Tools area. If you make changes to any settings in the Tools area, they are saved in the same way as if you changed them at the device.

The Remote Control Panel is useful for troubleshooting and may be used by your System

Administrator or Xerox support team if you report a fault.

When you open the Remote Control Panel, anyone standing at the device will see the actions you perform on the touch screen. They can also use the touch screen to override your selections. You can configure the Remote Control Panel so that the touch screen at the device is blocked while you are using it. When the touch screen is blocked the user at the device will see a message on the touch screen: Remote Session is active. Local Control Panel is not available. When you close the remote session, the touch screen will be available to use again.

Only one person can open the Remote Control Panel at a time.






Administrator.

6. If required, check the Block Local Control Panel checkbox.


9. When you have finished, click the Close button to close the Remote Control Panel window.

More Information



Viewing Machine Information from the Machine Status Menu



User Guide 639


®

5945/5955

Top right menu



Your System Administrator can use Authentication (Login Method) to control access to particular areas or features of the device. When Authentication is enabled, the area or feature is locked until you login. It is possible to lock individual services on the device control panel (such as E-mail and

Workflow Scanning), or lock individual pathways, such as the Services Home button.

Your System Administrator can also control access to the print features of the device. Print features include 1-sided printing, access to specific paper trays and the ability to print job types such as delayed print, saved job and sample set.






Administrator.


More Information

Logging out of Internet Services




Logging out of Internet Services


Use the Logout link to exit from Internet Services if you have logged in with your user name and password. It is important to use logout to stop other people using your login information to access device features.


640 User Guide

Internet Services


WorkCentre

®

5945/5955


More Information




Using the Index in Internet Services



Use the Index link to find a particular feature or setting in Internet Services. The Index displays a list of the pages available in Internet Services, with links that go directly to each page. Use the

Home link to return to the Internet Services Status tab.

The Internet Services feature is designed primarily for System Administrators. Non-administrators can access Internet Services and use some of the options, but many of the features listed are not available without a System Administrator login.





Administrator.


More Information

Using the Home link in Internet Services




Using the Site Map in Internet Services



User Guide 641


®

5945/5955

Use the Internet Services Site Map link to see a structure of the pages and features available in

Internet Services. The Site Map helps you find information more easily. Use the Home link to return to the Internet Services Status tab.

The Internet Services feature is designed primarily for System Administrators. Non-administrators can access Internet Services and use some of the options, but many of the features listed are not available without a System Administrator login.





Administrator.


More Information







Use the Internet Services Home link to return to the Status tab if you have opened the Index or Site

Map pages in Internet Services.




Administrator.

More Information



Using the Index in Internet Services

Using the Site Map in Internet Services


642 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Using the Internet Services Help Feature



Use the Internet Services Help link to see instructions and information on how to use the features in Internet Services. Internet Services Help opens in a new window.

Note: Internet Services is primarily a tool for System Administrators. The Help feature is written for

System Administrators rather than general users.





Administrator.


More Information




User Guide 643


®

5945/5955

644 User Guide

Paper and Media

10

Loading Tray 1 and Changing the Tray

Settings

This tray is fully adjustable and can be used for media sizes A5 LEF (5.5 x 8.5" LEF) to A3 (11 x 17").


Detailed media specifications for your device are provided at www.xerox.com

.

The trays automatically detect when the media they are loaded with is in low supply, or when they are empty. A warning message is displayed on the touch screen when a tray needs loading.

Always use the information labels in the tray for guidance on loading orientations and maximum fill information.

The tray is located on the front of the device and feeds the majority of media sizes. Media can be loaded Long Edge Feed (LEF) or Short Edge Feed (SEF). Your device uses a system of programable settings to manage the trays and media. These settings are established by your System

Administrator who can set the tray to Fully Adjustable or Dedicated.

• Fully Adjustable if this option is set, the paper settings screen is displayed each time the tray is opened and closed. Use the dropdown menus to change the size, type and color of the media loaded. The guides automatically detect the size of media loaded and the device gives a warning if the guides are not set correctly or a non-standard media size is used.

• Dedicated when a tray is opened a screen is displayed identifying the media that should be loaded in the tray. If the wrong size of media is loaded, or the tray guides are set incorrectly, the device gives a warning to adjust the guides.

Note: Only the System Administrator can change the media attributes for a dedicated tray.

If the tray is set as a Dedicated tray, the media requested must be loaded in the tray and the settings cannot be adjusted.

The tray can feed a range of media weights and types.

• The tray holds up to 500 sheets of 75 gsm (20 lb) paper.

• The media weight range is from 60 (16 lb) to 200 gsm (53 lb).

• The following media size range can be fed from the tray. From A5 LEF (5.5 x 8.5” LEF) to A3 SEF

(11 x 17” SEF). Custom sizes are also supported.

It is important to select the correct Type for the media loaded in the tray. The device can detect different types of media as each page travels through the paper path and will halt a job if a mismatch occurs.

User Guide 645

Paper and Media WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Only use the types of media specified for use in the tray.

• Plain

• Bond

• Recycled

• Punched

• Letterhead and Pre-printed

• Cardstock

• Up to 200 gsm (53 lb).

Only feed the media specified for this particular tray. The Bypass Tray can feed all the media types listed for the device and the optional Envelope Tray can be used in place of Tray 2 for envelopes.

!

Caution

A problem will occur if a tray is opened while it is being used to feed media.

!

Caution

Do not open Tray 1 if Tray 2 is open.

2. Place the media in the tray. Media must be positioned against the right side of the tray.

Paper must not be loaded above the maximum fill line.

• Load LEF pre-printed paper face-down and with the top towards the front of the device.

• Load SEF pre-printed paper face-down and with the top towards the left of the device.

• Load LEF hole punched paper with the holes towards the left of the device if the holes are along the longest edge of the paper. If the holes are along the shortest edge of the paper load it with the holes towards the back of the device.

• Load SEF hole punched paper with the holes towards the top of the device if the holes are along the longest edge of the paper. If the holes are along the shortest edge of the paper load it with the holes towards the left of the device.

3. Make sure that the guides just touch the paper.

• To position the right side guide, lift the latch mechanism and slide the guide to touch the right edge of the media.

• To position the front guide, lift the latch mechanism and slide the guide to touch the front edge of the media.

• To position the rear guide, lift the latch mechanism and slide the guide to touch the rear edge of the media.

4. Close the paper tray.

5. If the tray is set to Dedicated this is the end of the loading process.

If the tray is set to Fully Adjustable the paper tray settings will be displayed on the screen. If the settings are correct select the Confirm button. If the settings are not correct change the settings as required.

646 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Changing the paper tray settings

1. Select the Size option required. If the size required is not shown on the list select the Custom button.

• Use the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the width setting. Or select the Width (y) entry box and use the numeric keypad to enter the size required.

• Use the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the length setting. Or select the Length (x) entry box and use the numeric keypad to enter the size required.


2. Select the Type option required. If the type selected needs to be loaded in a particular orientation (such as letter head or hole punched stock) the display will change to show the correct orientation.

Note: If the Type option is not set correctly the device may process the page incorrectly, for example the image on the second side of letterhead pages may print upside down if the wrong media type is selected.

3. Select the Color option required.

More Information

Storing Paper and Other Media



Loading Tray 2 and Changing the Tray

Settings

This tray is fully adjustable and can be used for media sizes A5 LEF (5.5 x 8.5" LEF) to A3 (11 x 17").



.



User Guide 647


®

5945/5955

The tray is located on the front of the device and feeds the majority of media sizes. Media can be loaded Long Edge Feed (LEF) or Short Edge Feed (SEF). Your device uses a system of programable settings to manage the trays and media. These settings are established by your System

Administrator who can set the tray to Fully Adjustable or Dedicated.

• Fully Adjustable if this option is set, the paper settings screen is displayed each time the tray is opened and closed. Use the dropdown menus to change the size, type and color of the media loaded. The guides automatically detect the size of media loaded and the device gives a warning if the guides are not set correctly or a non-standard media size is used.

• Dedicated when a tray is opened a screen is displayed identifying the media that should be loaded in the tray. If the wrong size of media is loaded, or the tray guides are set incorrectly, the device gives a warning to adjust the guides.

Note: Only the System Administrator can change the media attributes for a dedicated tray.

If the tray is set as a Dedicated tray, the media requested must be loaded in the tray and the settings cannot be adjusted.


• The tray holds up to 500 sheets of 75 gsm (20 lb) paper.


• The following media size range can be fed from the tray. From A5 LEF (5.5 x 8.5” LEF) to A3 SEF

(11 x 17” SEF). Custom sizes are also supported.



• Plain

• Bond

• Recycled

• Punched


• Cardstock

• Up to 200 gsm (53 lb).

!

Caution


!

Caution



648 User Guide


®

5945/5955



• Load SEF pre-printed paper face-down and with the top towards the left of the device.

• Load LEF hole punched paper with the holes towards the left of the device if the holes are along the longest edge of the paper. If the holes are along the shortest edge of the paper load it with the holes towards the back of the device.

• Load SEF hole punched paper with the holes towards the top of the device if the holes are along the longest edge of the paper. If the holes are along the shortest edge of the paper load it with the holes towards the left of the device.

3. Make sure that the guides just touch the paper.

• To position the right side guide, lift the latch mechanism and slide the guide to touch the right edge of the media.

• To position the front guide, lift the latch mechanism and slide the guide to touch the front edge of the media.

• To position the rear guide, lift the latch mechanism and slide the guide to touch the rear edge of the media.


5. If the tray is set to Dedicated this is the end of the loading process.

If the tray is set to Fully Adjustable the paper tray settings will be displayed on the screen. If the settings are correct select the Confirm button. If the settings are not correct change the settings as required.









More Information




User Guide 649


®

5945/5955

Loading the Optional Envelope Tray

The optional envelope tray can be fitted instead of the paper tray 2 and used to print envelopes.

Note: . Do not feed window, board-backed, gusset type, padded or peel and seal envelopes, or envelopes with triangular flaps.


.



It is important to select the correct type for the media loaded in the tray. The device can detect different types of media as it travels through the paper path and will halt a job if a mismatch occurs.


• Monarch

• #10, #9

• C5

• DL (Wallet)

Only feed the media specified for this particular tray. The Bypass Tray can feed all the media types listed for the device.

!

Caution


!

Caution


2. Envelope loading orientations vary depending on their type.

• Monarch, #10, #9, C5 and DL (wallet): load face up with the flaps open and to the right.

• C5 (pocket): Load face up with the flaps either open or closed and towards the front.

• Custom Envelopes: Load face up, with the long edge of the envelope along the left side of the tray. For wallet envelopes ensure the flaps are open and facing to the right of the tray. For pocket envelopes, ensure flaps are closed and facing the front of the tray.

3. Load the envelopes, ensuring that the the maximum fill line is visible.

4. Adjust the guides.

• To position the right side guide, lift the latch mechanism and slide the guide so that the tip of the guide touches the envelopes.

• To position the front and rear guides, lift the latch mechanism and slide the guide to touch the envelopes.


6. The paper tray settings will be displayed on the screen. If the settings are correct select the

Confirm button. If the settings are not correct change the settings as required.

More Information




650 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Loading Tray 3

This is a high capacity paper tray used for media size A4 LEF (8.5 x 11" LEF).


.



This is an optional high capacity paper tray. It is intended to be a primary feeder tray for the most commonly used media. It is set as a dedicated tray and feeds only A4 (8.5 x 11”) LEF sized media.


• Up to 1600 sheets of 75 gsm (20 lb) paper.


Note: For 80 gsm paper capacities are slightly lower than specified.

Note: Your device does not warn you if the wrong sized media is loaded.



• Plain

• Bond

• Recycled

• Punched


• Cardstock

• Up to 200 gsm (53 lb).


!

Caution





• Load hole punched paper with the holes on the left edge.

User Guide 651

WorkCentre

®

5945/5955 Paper and Media


More Information




Loading Tray 4

This is a high capacity paper tray used for media size A4 LEF (8.5 x 11" LEF).


.



This is an optional high capacity paper tray. It is intended to be a primary feeder tray for the most commonly used media. It is set as a dedicated tray and feeds only A4 (8.5 x 11”) LEF sized media.



• Up to 2000 sheets of 75 gsm (20 lb) paper.


Note: For 80 gsm paper capacities are slightly lower than specified.

Note: Your device does not warn you if the wrong sized media is loaded.



• Plain

• Bond

• Recycled

• Punched


• Cardstock

• Up to 200 gsm (53 lb).

• Lightweight Cardstock


652 User Guide


®

5945/5955

!

Caution





• Load hole punched paper with the holes on the left edge.


More Information





This tray is used for non-standard printing media from A6 SEF (4.25 x 5.5" SEF) to 432 mm (17") wide.


The Bypass Tray is a paper tray on the left hand side of your device and can be folded away when not in use. It is primarily intended for use as a small quantity, special materials feeder and accommodates media of all types including transparencies (non-paper backed), envelopes and tabs.

When media is detected in the Bypass Tray a paper settings screen is displayed. Use the dropdown menus to change the size, type and color of the media loaded. The guides automatically detect the size of media loaded and the device gives a warning if the guides are not set correctly or a nonstandard media size is used.


• The tray holds up to 100 sheets of 75 gsm (20 lb) paper. The number of sheets is calculated proportionally based on the sheet thickness, for example the maximum for 216 gsm (75 lb) paper is 34 sheets.


• The following media size range can be fed from the tray. From A6 SEF (4.25 x 5.5" SEF) to A3

(11 x 17"). The width can be adjusted to any size within this range.


User Guide 653


®

5945/5955


• Plain

• Bond

• Recycled

• Carbonless

• Punched


• Cardstock

• Up to 200 gsm (53 lb).

• Labels

• Transparencies (paper backed and non paper backed)

• Envelopes

Note: Labels can only be printed 1-sided.

1. Make sure the tray is in the down position. For larger media, use the tray extension.



3. Place the media in the tray.

• Media must be positioned in the center of the tray against both the left and right side guides.

• Paper must not be loaded above the maximum fill line.

Load LEF pre-printed paper face-up and with the top towards the front of the device.

Load SEF pre-printed paper face-up and with the top towards the main body of the device.

Load LEF and SEF labels face-down.

Load LEF hole punched paper with the holes towards the main body of the device if the holes are along the longest edge of the paper. If the holes are along the shortest edge of the paper load it with the holes towards the back of the device.

Load SEF hole punched paper with the holes towards the top of the device if the holes are along the longest edge of the paper. If the holes are along the shortest edge of the paper load it with the holes towards the main body of the device.

Load transparencies face-down.

If the transparencies have a white strip load them with the white strip on the right.

Load SEF envelopes face down with flap closed. If the top edge of the envelope is the longest edge load it with the top edge towards the back of the device. If the top edge is the shortest edge, load it with the top edge towards the main body of the device.

4. Make sure that the paper guides just touch the paper.

The tray detects the position of the side guides to determine the size of the media.

5. The paper tray settings will be displayed on the screen. If the settings are correct select the

Confirm button. If the settings are not correct change the settings as required.

654 User Guide


®

5945/5955









More Information





Different types of media need to be treated differently before they are loaded into the trays, for example some media types need to be fanned while others don’t.

The orientation of the media in the tray depends on which tray you are using. See the instructions for loading the specific trays for more detail.

Punched

Before loading hole punched media make sure that any plugs or chads (the round pieces cut out of the paper to create the holes) do not remain in the stack. Fan the media to separate the individual sheets.

Transparencies

Load transparencies on top of a small stack of same-size paper and fan transparencies to stop them sticking together.

If a coating of oil remains on the transparency after printing, remove it with a lint free cloth.

Labels

Labels that have been designed for laser devices, such as Xerox Labels are supported. The adhesives are designed to withstand the higher temperatures of these devices without bleeding and causing spotting or damage to the internal components.

User Guide 655


®

5945/5955

Labels should be left in the printing environment for 72 hours before being used in the printer to allow them to adjust to the ambient temperature.

Leave labels sealed in their plastic wrapping until they are ready to be loaded into the printer.

Note: Do not fan the label sheets before use unless the package instructs you to do so. If jamming or multi-sheet feeding occurs shuffle the labels before loading. Labels can only be printed 1-sided.

Note: Dry gum labels can cause dry particles of glue to detach from the backing and should not be used.

Envelopes

The device supports diamond/banker, pocket and wallet envelopes. Lightweight and medium weight are acceptable and envelope seals can be gummed or press and seal.

The following envelope sizes are supported:

• DL (Wallet) and C5 (Wallet and Pocket)

• Monarch and #10 (Wallet)

• Custom Sizes (less reliable feed and image quality)

Note: Do not feed window, board backed, gusset type, padded or peal and seal envelopes, or envelopes with triangular flaps.

More Information




Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4


656 User Guide

Machine and Job

Status

11

Job Status

Active Jobs

Viewing Active Jobs using the Job Status Menu

The Job Status button gives you access to job information. You can use this to check the progress of active jobs or display detailed information about jobs you have completed. You can also release held jobs or secure print jobs you have sent to the device.

Use the Active Jobs screen to see all the jobs currently in the list waiting to be processed. Each job is identified with the owner, job name and status of the job. The Active Jobs list displays up to 150 jobs.

The Job Status is updated as jobs are processed and printed. The status options available depend on the type of job.

• Printing indicates that the device is currently printing the job.

• Processing the device is formatting the job ready to print.

• Waiting to Print the job is ready to print and is waiting for the current job to finish printing and the required resources to become available.

• Held: Deferred Print the job is waiting to be released from the print queue.

• Scheduling the job has been converted into the appropriate format and is being scheduled to print.

• Pending the job has been scanned, but is awaiting the resources to be formatted.

• Paused the active job was paused. Jobs can be paused due to a system fault during the running of the job. Paused jobs are not deleted from the list and can be resumed.

• Interrupted the job was suspended because a task at the device is being performed. Once the task has been completed the suspended job automatically continues.

• Sending the device is sending the job through a network transmission.

• Completed the job was successfully completed without errors.

• Formatting the job is being converted into the appropriate format. For print jobs the job is decompressed, for Fax, Internet Fax, Scan and E-mail tasks the job is compressed.

• Scanning the device is currently scanning the image for this job, ready for formatting.

User Guide 657

Machine and Job Status WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

• Held the job has been temporarily stopped from printing because the required resources are not available. The job remains in the job list and continues to proceed up the list as prior jobs are printed. If a held job is at the top of the list all subsequent jobs continue to be processed and printed, a held job does not hold up other jobs in the list. The reason for the held status is displayed on the Job Progress screen.

• Receiving the device is receiving the job through a network transmission.

• Deleted the job has been deleted from the job list.

• Completed with Errors the job was completed with errors.

2. If required, select the Active Jobs tab on the touch screen. This is usually the active tab when the Job Status feature opens.

3. If required, use the scroll bar to access all the jobs in the list.

The most recently submitted job is displayed at the bottom of the list. The sequence of print jobs can be altered by promoting or deleting jobs in the list.

4. Select the option required from the All Jobs dropdown menu.

• Copy, Print and Fax Received Jobs lists the jobs that have been sent to the device from the Copy, Print and Fax services.

• Scan Jobs and Fax Sent Jobs shows the jobs submitted by the Scan and Fax services.

• All Jobs displays all the jobs on the device.

More Information


Viewing the Progress and Details of a Job using the Job Status Menu


Use the Job Progress screen to delete or release a job. You can also view the job details and resources required to complete the job.









658 User Guide


®

5945/5955


• Delete removes the selected job from the list. Any job can be deleted using this option, regardless of the job originator.

• Promote moves a job to the top of the list. It will be completed after the current job. The

Promote option is only available if a job is processing.

• Release submits a job that is held in the queue.

• Hold pauses the job until it is released or deleted.

• Job Progress shows the current status of the job.


Select the Close button.

• Details provides information about the job depending on the type of job, for example the submission time, image quality settings, secure print setting, finishing options and sender’s

E-mail address.

• Close closes the Job Control menu.

• Required Resources displays the resources needed to complete the job, for example special paper or staples.

• Program Next Job selects the service and features required for the next job while the current job is in progress.

More Information



Printing a Secure Print Job using the PostScript Driver

Releasing a Held Job using the Job Status Menu


Use the job queue list to see if a job is held because it requires additional resources to print, or whether it is a Sample Set (Proof Print) job that is waiting to be released.









More Information



Releasing a Secure Fax Job using the Job Status Menu

User Guide 659


®

5945/5955

Releasing a Secure Print Job using the Job Status Menu


Use the Secure Print Jobs tab to see a list of print jobs that have been sent to the device with a passcode. You can only print a secure print job with the passcode that was entered when the print job was created. If the Secure Print Jobs tab is not available the System Administrator may have configured the Hold All Jobs feature.


2. If required, select the Secure Print Jobs tab on the touch screen. A list of secure print jobs will be displayed. If your job is not on the main tab or the secure print jobs list select the

Unidentified Secure Jobs tab.


5. Use the numeric keypad to enter your passcode.

More Information





Releasing a Secure Fax Job using the Job Status Menu


Use the Secure Fax Jobs tab to see a list of print jobs that have been sent to the device with a passcode. You can only print a secure print job with the passcode that was entered when the print job was created. If the Secure Fax Jobs tab is not available the System Administrator may have configured the Hold All Jobs feature.



If your job is not on the main tab or the secure fax jobs list select the Unidentified Secure Jobs tab.



660 User Guide


®

5945/5955

More Information





Releasing Jobs Held in a Public Queue using the Job Status Menu


Your System Administrator can set the device to hold all print jobs in a private or public queue.


If the Hold Jobs in a Public Queue feature has been configured, the Job Status menu displays the

Held Print Jobs tab. You can view and release your print jobs from the Held Print Jobs screen.


3. If required, use the scroll bar to access all the folders in the list.

4. Select the folder containing your jobs.


• Release All prints all the jobs in your folder.

• Release prints a single selected job.

Note: If your job was sent using the Secure Print option you will need to use the numeric keypad to enter your passcode, then select the OK button.


More Information




Releasing Jobs Held in a Private Queue using the Job Status Menu




If the Hold Jobs in a Private Queue feature has been configured the Job Status menu displays the

My Held Print Jobs tab. You can view and release your print jobs from the Held Print Jobs screen. You will need to login to the device to view the My Held Print Jobs tab.

User Guide 661

Machine and Job Status


name.

WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

8. Select the folder containing your jobs.


• Release All prints all the jobs in your folder.

• Release prints a single selected job.

Note: If your job was sent using the Secure Print option you will need to use the numeric keypad to enter your passcode, then select the OK button.




More Information




Viewing the Unidentified Held Jobs Queue using the Job Status Menu



If the Hold All Jobs feature is enabled and the device receives a job from an unknown user, the job will belisted on the Unidentified Held Jobs tab.

The Unidentified Held Jobs tab displays a list of unidentified print jobs that have been held in accordance with the Unidentified Job Policies set up by your System Administrator.


662

• If the machine’s unidentified job policy has been set to Hold Jobs; Only Administrators

can Manage Jobs, held jobs can be released or deleted by your System Administrator.

• If the machine’s unidentified job policy has been set to Hold Jobs; All Users can Manage

Jobs, jobs can be released or deleted by any user.

User Guide


®

5945/5955

More Information





Accessing Your Personal Secure Jobs List using the Job Status

Menu


When you are logged in to the device and send a secure job to the device you can view your job on the Secure Jobs or the My Secure Jobs tab. Secure Jobs have been sent to the device with a passcode. You can only print a secure print job with the passcode that was entered when the print job was created.


System Administrator has set up your account. Any secure print jobs waiting to print are displayed on the screen.






More Information



Printing a Secure Print Job using the PostScript Driver

Printing a Secure Print Job using the PCL Print Driver


User Guide 663


®

5945/5955

Viewing Completed Jobs using the Job Status Menu


Use the Completed Jobs option to view the jobs which have been completed on the device. Up to

150 jobs can be displayed. The owner, name and status of each job are shown.








More Information



Machine Status

Viewing Machine Information from the Machine Status Menu

The Machine Status button gives you access to useful information about the machine, including the serial number and model. You can also view the status of the paper trays, billing and supplies information, and print useful information pages.

Use the Machine Information option to see the customer support and supplies contact details, the machine serial number and the software version number. If the Embedded Fax feature is installed, the fax number is also displayed.

The machine information is displayed in different sections.

• Customer Support provides information about where to find additional help for the device.

• Machine Model displays the Xerox model of your device.

• Serial Number displays the serial number of your device.

• Software Versions identifies the version of software installed on your device and the date of the last upgrade.

• IPv4 Address shows the network address of your device.

664 User Guide


®

5945/5955

• Host Name states the name assigned to your device when it was set up by your System

Administrator.

• Fax Line gives the fax number for your device, if configured.

2. View the information required, or select the option required for further information.

• Paper Tray Status displays the type of paper loaded in each tray, and its status.

• Information Pages allows you to print useful information about the device including a configuration report.

• Installed Options displays the services installed on the device and their status.

• Maintenance Assistant allows you to send information to Xerox about the device to assist with troubleshooting.

More Information



Viewing the Status of Paper Trays from the Machine Status Menu


Use the Paper Tray Status option to see the paper size, type and color set for each paper tray as well as how full each tray is.

More Information




Use the Information Pages option to access and print the Configuration Report, the Quick Use

Guide, the PCL Font List and PostScript Font List. The Configuration Report provides information about your device, including the serial number, IP Address, device configuration and the software version.


3. Select a document in the list.

User Guide 665


®

5945/5955 of the job.


More Information




Viewing the Information Pages in Internet Services

Viewing the Status of Installed Options using the Machine Status

Menu


Use the Installed Options screen to view the status of services installed on the device. Services include Workflow Scanning, E-mail and Fax. Services can be selected from the Services Home button on the Control Panel. If the status for a service displays as Disabled, the service is installed but not enabled.

3. A list of the services or additional solutions installed on your device is displayed. If required, use the scroll bar to access the entire list.

More Information



Using the Maintenance Assistant from the Machine Status Menu




666

You can continue to use the machine while the data is transferred. A Configuration Report will print when the transfer is complete. Your Xerox Representative will advise you of the next steps.

User Guide


®

5945/5955

More Information




Faults and Alerts

Viewing Faults using the Machine Status Menu


Use the Faults option to see details of any errors on the device. This will help you troubleshoot problems. The Active Messages screen also contains a Fault History button which displays fault codes and the date they occurred on the device.

your device.

4. Select a fault for information that will help you resolve the fault.

5. If required, select the Fault History button to see details of previous faults.

• Select the Close button.

More Information


Viewing Alert Messages using the Machine Status Menu


Use the Alerts option see details of any warnings relating to the device. Alerts identify status such as low paper, or that a consumable will soon need replacing.

your device.

4. Select an alert for information that will help you respond to the alert message.

More Information


User Guide 667


®

5945/5955

Checking the Status of Supplies using the Machine Status Menu


Use the Supplies section to monitor the status of the components you can replace yourself, without support from a Xerox Support Representative.

Note: If you need to reduce the amount of time you spend managing the replaceable units for your device you may find the SMart eSolutions Supplies Assistant

®

feature helpful. The Supplies

Assistant

®

automatically orders replacement units from Xerox so you don’t have to manage them manually.

• Toner Cartridge

• Print Cartridge

• Fuser Module

• Transfer Roller

The information includes the percentage remaining before the units need to be replaced. The projected number of days and pages remaining are also shown.

3. Select a customer replaceable unit from the list. Information about the unit will display.

• Reorder Part Number identifies the part number for this unit. This is useful when you need to reorder the unit.

• Supplies Phone Number displays the phone number to reorder the unit.

• Estimated Pages Remaining calculates the approximate number of pages the unit can produce before it needs to be replaced.

• Estimated Days Remaining calculates the approximate number of days before the unit needs to be replaced.

• Date Installed states the date this unit was put into the machine.

More Information


Using the Supplies Assistant in Internet Services


Billing Information

Viewing Billing Information using the Machine Status Menu


Use the Billing Information page to find the serial number and the total number of impressions made by your device. This page is useful if you need to provide information about the device for billing purposes.

668 User Guide


®

5945/5955



More Information



Viewing Machine Usage Statistics using the Machine Status Menu


Use the Usage Counters page to see the number of impressions copied and printed, and the number of images sent by the device using the fax or scanning features.



4. Select the option required from the All Usage Counters dropdown menu.

• Impression Counters highlight the number of impressions made by the device. This may or may not equal the number of sheets counted depending on whether your device is set up to count large sheets as large impressions or as multiple smaller impressions.

• Sheet Counters show the number of impressions made by the device. 2-sided sheets are identified as a separate line from single sided sheets.

• Images Sent Counters list the number of images sent using the Fax, E-mail or Scanning features.

• Fax Impressions Counters state the number of images sent using the Fax features. Each fax feature is identified on a separate line.

• All Usage Counters show all the usage for the device.

More Information



User Guide 669


®

5945/5955

670 User Guide

Administration and

Accounting

12


Authentication is used to manage access to the device or specific features. Accounting is used to record numbers of prints or scans produced at the device. If authentication or accounting is enabled you will need to log into the device.


Use the Login feature if your System Administrator has enabled Authentication (Login Method) or

Accounting on your device. If you see the Authentication Required or Accounting screens, you must login before you can use some or all of the services. The login method depends on how your System

Administrator has configured the device. You may need to use a card reader, coin slot, or enter a user ID. Use these instructions if your System Administrator has set up the device to prompt you for a user ID.


1. If only some of the features on your device are covered by authentication and accounting, select a locked feature to open the login screen. If all the features are covered by authentication and accounting the login screen will be displayed automatically.

5. If prompted, select the Enter Account ID entry box and use the touch screen keyboard to enter your Account ID.

More Information



User Guide 671

Administration and Accounting WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

Logging out at the Device

Authentication is used to manage access to the device or specific features. Accounting is used to record numbers of prints or scans produced at the device. If authentication or accounting is enabled you will need to log into the device.


Use the Logout feature if your System Administrator has enabled Authentication (Login Method) or Accounting features on your device and you logged in to the device to access services. Logging out is important to stop other users using the services with your account information.



More Information




Accessing the Tools Menu

You can use the Tools menu to adjust the brightness of the Control Panel display, change the billing impression mode or enable an optional feature on your device.



More Information



Changing the Billing Impression Mode using the Tools Menu


Adjusting the Display Brightness using the Tools Menu

Checking the Device Network Connection using the Echo Test Option within the Tools Menu

672 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Device Settings

General

Changing the Billing Impression Mode using the Tools Menu


Use the Billing Impression Mode option to change the billing plan for your device. There are 2 billing impression modes which define how the device tracks images made on large-sized paper such as

A3 or tabloid. The images can either be tracked as one large image or multiple smaller images.

You should only use this feature if advised to do so by your Xerox Representative.

Before you begin

You will need information from your Xerox Representative.

• The PIN.

• Information on which option to select from the Impression Mode menu.


Obtaining your PIN information to your Xerox Representative before they can give you a PIN to change the billing impression mode.

Changing the billing impression mode

7. Use the touch screen keyboard to enter your PIN number.

9. Select the option your Xerox Representative advised you to select from the Impression Mode menu.

User Guide 673


®

5945/5955


More Information

Viewing Billing Information using the Machine Status Menu



Changing the Billing Impression Mode in Internet Services

Installing Optional Services using the Tools Menu


Use the Feature Installation screen to install optional services on your device, for example the XPS

(XML Paper Specification) feature, which enables the device to print XML Paper Specification files.

Use the Software Activation Portal (SWAP) to obtain a Feature Installation Key.

Feature Installation Keys are used to install optional services on the device. When you purchase an optional service you will receive a kit which contains an activation key. Enter the activation key and your machine serial number on the SWAP website to receive a Feature Installation Key.

To obtain the kit for an optional service you want to install please refer to your Xerox Representative.


6. Use the touch screen keyboard to enter the Feature Key.

More Information



Using the Software Activation Portal (SWAP) to obtain a Feature Installation Key

Adjusting the Display Brightness using the Tools Menu


Use the Display / Brightness option to adjust the brightness of the touch screen to suit the ambient light levels.

674 User Guide


®

5945/5955

5. Move the Brighten / Darken indicator towards Brighten to increase the illumination or move the indicator towards Darken to reduce the brightness.

More Information



Troubleshooting

Checking the Device Network Connection using the Echo Test

Option within the Tools Menu



Use the Echo Test option to check the device is connected to your network. This feature is only likely to be needed by your System Administrator or Xerox support team.



• TCP / IP tests the TCP / IP network connection.

• AppleTalk tests the AppleTalk network connection.

• Novell or IPX tests the Novell / IPX network connection.

Note: If AppleTalk is grayed out, the AppleTalk protocol must be enabled. If Novell or IPX is grayed out, the NetWare protocol must be enabled.

8. The screen displays a message to show the result of the Echo Test.

More Information



User Guide 675


®

5945/5955

Perform a Software Reset

You can use the Tools menu to adjust the brightness of the Control Panel display, change the billing impression mode, perform a software reset or enable optional features on your device.


Use Software Reset if you need to reboot the device. A software reset does not turn the device off and is faster and wastes fewer consumables than turning the power off and then on.


6. Select the required option:

• All Software resets the network and copy system software.

• Network Software resets the network controller software.

• Copy Software resets the copy system software.

More Information



676 User Guide

Feature Installation

13

Using the Software Activation Portal

(SWAP) to obtain a Feature Installation

Key

Use the Software Activation Portal (SWAP) to obtain a Feature Installation Key.

Feature Installation Keys are used to install optional services on the device. When you purchase an optional service you will receive a kit which contains an activation key. Enter the activation key and your machine serial number on the SWAP website to receive a Feature Installation Key.

To obtain the kit for an optional service you want to install please refer to your Xerox Representative.

Use the Feature Installation screen to install optional services on your device, for example the XPS

(XML Paper Specification) feature, which enables the device to print XML Paper Specification files.



2. In the URL field, use your keyboard to enter http://www.xeroxlicensing.xerox.com/ to access the

Xerox Software Activation Portal (SWAP).

number of your device.

9. A Feature Installation Key code will display. Keep the key code in a safe place.

More Information




Locating the Serial Number for Your Device

User Guide 677

Feature Installation WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

678 User Guide

General Care and

Troubleshooting

14

General Care

Customer Replaceable Units

Identifying the Replaceable Units

There are several consumables on the device that need replenishing or replacing, such as paper, staples, and customer replaceable units.

The device will display a message on the touch screen when any of the units need to be re-ordered.

This message is a warning that the unit is nearing the end of its life. Only replace the unit when a message actually instructs you to do so.

!

WARNING


You cannot maintain or service any of the parts that are behind these covers and guards. Do NOT

User Guide 679

General Care and Troubleshooting WorkCentre

®

5945/5955 attempt any maintenance procedure that is NOT specifically described in the documentation supplied for your device.

More Information

Replacing the Toner Cartridge

Replacing the Print Cartridge

Replacing the Toner Cartridge

The device displays the status code 09-588-00.

The message on the device touch screen reads: Replace Toner Cartridge (R1).

The Toner Cartridge is a replaceable unit on the device. You will be notified by the device when the cartridge needs replacing.

!

WARNING


You cannot maintain or service any of the parts that are behind these covers and guards. Do NOT attempt any maintenance procedure that is NOT specifically described in the documentation supplied for your device.

1. Open the front door on the device.

2. Rotate the orange toner cartridge locking lever anti-clockwise to release the toner cartridge.

The lever is located below the cylindrical toner cartridge.

3. Remove the used toner cartridge from the device and dispose of the toner cartridge.

Note: For the latest recycling information, visit www.xerox.com

.

4. Unpack the new toner cartridge from its box.

5. Shake the new cartridge gently from side to side to loosen the toner. Keep the cartridge upright to avoid spilling any toner.

Note: Dry toner is easier to remove than wet toner. If you spill toner onto your skin or clothing shake off as much as possible, then brush the rest off with a dry cloth. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove spills from carpet.

6. Insert the new cartridge in the device and push it gently until you hear it click into place.

7. Rotate the orange toner cartridge locking lever clockwise to lock the toner cartridge into place.

8. Close the front door of the device.


More Information

Cleaning the Print Head



Replacing the Print Cartridge


The message on the device touch screen reads: Replace Print Cartridge (R2).

680 User Guide


®

5945/5955

The print cartridge is a replaceable unit on the device. You will be notified by the device when the module needs replacing.

!

WARNING


You cannot maintain or service any of the parts that are behind these covers and guards. Do NOT attempt any maintenance procedure that is NOT specifically described in the documentation supplied for your device.



3. Open the new print cartridge box. Remove the card liner and place it next to the box.

4. Open the resealable bag, remove the top packaging and place it on top of the card liner.

5. Unpack the new print cartridge and place it on top of the packaging, next to the box.

!

WARNING

Keep print cartridges upright, to avoid spilling, and do not place on unprotected surfaces.

Note: Hold the print cartridge away from you to avoid spilling any toner residue onto yourself.

Note: Dry toner is easier to remove than wet toner. If you spill toner onto your skin or clothing shake off as much as possible, then brush the rest off with a dry cloth. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove spills from carpet.

6. Rotate the orange print cartridge locking lever anti-clockwise until it clicks. The lever is to the right of the print cartridge unit, which is labelled R2.

7. Lift the orange cartridge handle slightly and pull the cartridge half out of the device.

8. Lift the carrying handle on the top of the cartridge and use it to support the weight while you remove it from the device.

9. Place the old print cartridge in the box the new cartridge came in and reseal the bag.

10. Insert the new print cartridge into the device using the orange handle on the top to lift it.

11. Rotate the orange lever clockwise to latch the print cartridge into place.


13. Lift the door on the left side of the device and gently push it towards the device until you hear it click into place.

Note: For more detailed instructions see the device touch screen or the instructions provided with the replacement consumable.

More Information


User Guide 681


®

5945/5955

Staple Cartridges and Hole Punch Waste

Staple Cartridges

Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Office Finisher


The message on the device touch screen reads: Replace Staple Cartridge (R7).

This finisher and some of its’ components are optional and may not be fitted to your device.

1. Open the finisher front door.

2. Locate the staple cartridge unit.

3. If required, turn the staple head movement wheel fully clockwise. This will rotate the staple unit slightly and may make it easier for you to access.

4. Grasp the cartridge by the orange handle and pull it out of the device.

5. Check you have removed the paper tab from the new staple cartridge.

6. Insert the new cartridge by pushing it straight into the device until it clicks into place.

Note: For more detailed instructions see the device touch screen or the instructions provided with the new staples.

7. Close the finisher door.

More Information

Replacing the Staple Cartridges in the New Office Finisher Booklet Maker

Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Convenience Stapler

Replacing the Staple Cartridges in the New Office Finisher Booklet Maker

The device displays the status code 12-644-03 or 12-714-03.

If the message on the device touch screen reads: Replace Staple Cartridge (R7) replace the main cartridge.

If the message on the device touch screen reads: Replace Booklet Maker Staple Cartridges (R8) replace the booklet maker cartridges.


Main Cartridge


2. Locate the staple cartridge. This is towards the top of the finisher to the right of handle 5b.

3. If required, turn the staple head movement wheel fully clockwise. This will rotate the staple unit slightly and may make it easier for you to access.



6. Insert the new cartridge by pushing it straight into the device until it clicks into place.

682 User Guide


®

5945/5955


Booklet Maker Cartridges

Note: If you experience difficulty performing this task, it may be necessary to request a service engineer to perform it for you.


2. Locate the staple cartridges. These are in the upper left part of the cavity at the bottom of the unit.

3. Remove each staple cartridge individually by pulling the orange handle upwards.


5. Insert the new cartridges one at a time by pushing each up and then to the left (almost in a clockwise motion) until the cartridge clicks into place.


More Information

Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Office Finisher



Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Convenience Stapler

1. Lift the orange handle on the back of the convenience stapler. This will raise the back of the unit and expose the staple cartridge.



4. Install the replacement staple cartridge.

5. Push the orange handle on the back of the convenience stapler to return the device to the original position.

Note: For more detailed instructions see the device touch screen or the instructions provided with the new staples.

More Information



Emptying the Hole Punch Waste

The hole punch waste container is a catch tray that collects the waste punched paper. Your device will prompt you when the hole punch waste container needs emptying.



2. Locate the hole punch waste container. It is at the top of the device, near label 5a.

3. Grasp the orange handle and pull the waste container straight out of the finisher.

4. Dispose of the waste punched paper in the waste bin.

5. Re-insert the waste container and push it gently into the device as far as it can go.

User Guide 683


®

5945/5955


Note: For more detailed instructions see the device touch screen.

Cleaning the Document Glass and Both Constant Velocity

Transport Glass Strips

To ensure optimum print quality at all times, regularly clean the glass areas of your device. This helps avoid output with streaks, smears and other marks that may transfer from the glass area when scanning documents.

When you use the document feeder, your documents will also pass over the stationary scanner and the Constant Velocity Transport glass. Any dirt or marks on either piece of glass will cause lines or streaks on your copies, faxes or scanned images. Also, any marks or dirt on the document feeder pad may show through the document and appear on your scanned images.

1. Open the document feeder (as if you were about to copy a document using the document glass).

2. Lightly dampen a lint-free cloth with water, Xerox cleaning fluid or Xerox film remover.

3. Clean the under side of the document feeder pad on the underside of the document handler).

4. Clean the large glass area. Do not pour the cleaning liquid directly on to the glass.

5. Clean the thin strip of glass to the left of the large glass area (this is the constant velocity transport glass).

6. Locate the green latch underneath the front of the section you just raised. Lower the green latch.

7. Clean the thin strip of glass located to the right of the white strip (this is the side 2 scan assembly glass). Use a microfiber wiper, dampened with antistatic fluid to clean the side 2 scan assembly glass. The glass is clear and difficult to see, insert the cloth as far as it will go to the right of the white strip and you’ll feel that the glass is there.

Note: To remove any particles that stick to the glass, use a folded up sheet of paper or run the edge of a plastic card across the glass.

8. Wipe away any residue with dry microfiber wiper.

!

WARNING

When cleaning the device do NOT use organic or strong chemical solvents or aerosol cleaners. Do

NOT pour fluids directly onto any area. Use supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in this documentation. Keep all cleaning materials out of the reach of children.

!

WARNING

Do not use pressurized air-spray cleaning aids on or in this equipment. Some pressurized air-spray containers contain explosive mixtures and are not suitable for use in electrical applications. Use of such cleaners can result in a risk of explosion and fire.


Regularly clean the print head to maintain print quality. The print head can be cleaned at any time, but if you clean it every time you replace the toner you will be cleaning it at the right interval to keep the quality high enough for most users.

684 User Guide


®

5945/5955

!

WARNING


You cannot maintain or service any of the parts that are behind these covers and guards. Do NOT attempt any maintenance procedure that is NOT specifically described in the documentation supplied with your device.


2. Rotate the orange print cartridge locking lever anti-clockwise until it clicks. The lever is to the right of the print cartridge unit, which is labelled R2.

3. Locate the blue handle at the top right of the print cartridge and pull it out of the device until it stops (after about 40 cm or 16").

4. Push the blue handle slowly and gently back into the device again to wipe the print head clean.

5. Pull the blue handle out of the device and push it in again two more times.

6. Rotate the orange print cartridge locking lever clockwise to latch the print cartridge and print head cleaning tool in place.


Cleaning the Control Panel, Touch Screen, Document Feeder and

Output Trays

Regular cleaning keeps the touch screen, control panel and other device areas free from dust and dirt.

1. Use a soft, lint-free cloth, lightly dampened with water.

2. Wipe clean the entire area of the control panel, including the touch screen.

3. Wipe clean the document feeder, output trays, paper trays and other outside areas of your device.

4. Remove any residue with a clean cloth or paper towel.


It is important for optimum printing that paper is stored correctly. Take note of the following when storing media.

• Store at ambient temperature. Damp paper may cause problems or poor image quality.

Note: In most air conditioned offices the ambient (room) temperature and humidity is fairly constant and is suitable for storing paper. If your office is very warm or humid it’s best to store the paper in another area where it can be kept between 20-24.5°C at 35-55% relative humidity. Paper that is not stored near the machine should be left in its’ wrapper by the device to acclimatise for 1 hour before use (to reduce the chance of the paper curling when heated by the device).

• Do not open reams of paper until they are required for use. The ream wrapper contains an inner lining that protects the paper from moisture.

• Store on a flat surface to prevent the paper from folding or curling.

• Stack reams of paper carefully on top of one another to avoid crushing the edges. Do not stack more than five reams on top of each other.

User Guide 685


®

5945/5955

Note: For more information on paper storage see the Xerox website www.xerox.com

/printersupplies/paper-stock/paper-storage/enlu.html.

It is important for optimum printing that paper is stored and loaded correctly. Take note of the following when loading media.

• Do not use folded or wrinkled papers.

• Do not load paper of varied sizes into the tray.

• If feed problems occur, fan the media or shuffle labels before loading.

Note: The tray capacities have been designed so that you can insert whole packets of paper.

Always load the complete ream rather than leaving some paper remaining in the opened wrapper (as the opened paper left in the wrapper will pick up moisture from the air and become more likely to cause jams when eventually used).

Troubleshooting


A variety of situations can affect the quality of your output. For optimal performance, ensure the guidelines are followed.

• Do not position the device in direct sunlight or near a heat source such as a radiator.

• Avoid sudden changes in the environment surrounding the device. When a change occurs, allow the device at least two hours to adjust to its new environment, depending on the extent of the change.

• Follow routine maintenance schedules for cleaning both the document glass and Constant

Velocity Transport glass panels.

• Follow routine maintenance schedules for cleaning the touch screen.

• Always set the edge guides in the paper trays to the size of the media in the tray and ensure the screen is displaying the correct size and media type.

• Follow routine maintenance schedules for cleaning the print head.

• Ensure paper clips, staples and paper debris do not contaminate the device.

• Use the recommended quality paper.

Note: If your copy or ID card copy output seems a little pale, check your System Administrator has not enabled the Toner Saver feature.

More Information

Cleaning the Document Glass and Both Constant Velocity Transport Glass Strips



686 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Understanding Faults

There are different categories of faults that can occur on your device and different ways in which they are identified depending on the type of fault occurring. This section gives an overview of the different types of faults and the way that faults are displayed and recorded.

Your device has three fault types.

• Hard Down faults

• User Clearable faults

• Status Messages

Within each fault type there are subgroups of fault categories relating to the effect the fault has on the device operation. The fault display generated for each fault depends on the category of that fault.

If rebooting the device does not resolve the problem, use the instructions on this site to identify and solve the problem. If you still cannot fix the problem, contact the Xerox Support Center for advice.

Hard Down Faults

Hard Down faults prevent a subsystem, module or component from functioning properly. There are three categories of Hard Down faults.

• Low Level Fault this occurs when a subsystem or module is unable to function correctly. For example, if during a stapler job a fault is detected, other features are still functional but the stapler is unavailable.

• Failure Fault this is declared when a low level fault causes a major subsystem to function incorrectly. For example if a fault occurs with the print cartridge causing the print and copy features to become non-functioning.

• Fatal Fault this occurs when a system wide failure exists that is unrecoverable. For example a power fault occurs causing the device to be inoperable.

Customer Clearable Faults

A Customer Clearable fault is a fault that can be cleared by the user. There are three categories of

Customer Clearable faults:

• Low Level Fault this occurs when a subsystem has detected a customer clearable fault, for example, when a stapler runs out of staples. The print and copy features are still operable, but the stapler function is not.

• Failure Fault this is declared when a Low Level Fault causes a major subsystem to become unavailable. For example, when a paper misfeed is detected, the print and copy functions are made inoperable until the paper is cleared by the user.

• Reset Fault this can be cleared by powering the device off then on again.

User Guide 687


®

5945/5955

Alerts

Alerts are informal messages that do not stop the device from functioning properly. There are two categories of Alert:

• Warning Messages are informational and usually have to do with replacing consumables. The messages warn the local user of impending problems, or actions, that need to be taken to avoid a fault occurring. For example, if the print cartridge is close to the end of its life, the device displays a warning message that the unit needs to be replaced soon. At this time the system sets a pre-defined limit until a Customer Clearable fault is declared to change the print cartridge.

• Job Fault Messages indicate a fault with the job, for example the required paper is unavailable. If a job is paused because of a fault, the user is required to take action to correct the condition, or to delete the job.

Fault Displays

All faults that affect the users of the device are presented to the user as either an Interrupting Fault or a Non-Interrupting Fault.

Interrupting Fault

Interrupting faults are presented if the associated fault affects the entire device, where the device is not capable of accepting input or output. They are also presented if the associated fault affects the currently selected document service but does not affect another service, which can still be used.

The type of fault screen presented depends on the type of fault occurring. Some fault displays present the user with fault recovery options. A selection of buttons allow you to choose a fault recovery option.

When an interrupting fault window is displayed, any status messages associated with the displayed fault are presented in the Status Message area.

Non-Interrupting Fault

Non-Interrupting fault displays consist of messages displayed in the Status Message area. They do not affect the successful completion of a job from the current pathway. For example, if the user is running a Copy job and a fault occurs with faxing, then a non-interrupting fault display is presented.

Both Interrupting and Non-Interrupting fault displays are generated automatically by the device and are displayed in the fault logs. Once the conditions which resulted in the fault display being generated have been resolved, the display is removed.

688 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Fault Logs

Fault information can be accessed using the Machine Status button.

Machine Status provides information about the device, the status of the paper trays, consumables and any current faults. Usage counters are also available.

The Active Messages tab displays fault listings and the device error logs.

The faults are separated into Faults, Alerts and Fault History.

• Faults this option displays a list of any current faults on the device. Each fault can be selected for further information and instructions.

• Alerts this option displays a list of all the current fault messages associated with the current device status and faults.

• Fault History this is a log of the last 20 faults occurring on the device. The fault code associated with each fault and the date and time a fault occurred is displayed. It also displays the device image count at the time each fault occurred and any relevant paper or document size information.

More Information

Viewing Alert Messages using the Machine Status Menu

Viewing Faults using the Machine Status Menu

User Guide 689


®

5945/5955

Paper Jams

Document Feeder

Clearing a Misfeed in the Top of the Document Feeder

The device displays status code 05-330-00, 05-335-00 or 05-361-00.

The message on the device touch screen reads: Misfeed in Document Feeder. Open the

Document Feeder Top Cover.

Follow the instructions provided on the Control Panel.

If you are unable to resolve the problem, contact the Xerox Support Center.

Note: If your original document has previously been stapled the corners of the leading edge of the pages fed into the device may be very bent. To avoid misfeeds re-orient your originals so that an unbent side is the leading edge.

Note: Any damaged or poor quality originals in a set can be copied using the document glass and the undamaged copy can then be added to the set instead of the original.

Note: If your original document is less than 14.8cm (5.5") long it may trigger a misfeed. If possible, rotate the document by 90° to make it longer. If the document is still too short the document glass will have to be used instead of the document feeder.

1. Remove all the documents from the document feeder and input and output trays.

2. Check that none of the originals are stapled or folded together.

3. Open the document feeder top cover.

4. Remove any jammed document.

5. Close the document feeder top cover.

6. Re-order your originals and begin your job again following the instructions on the control panel.

Job recovery will usually take place, so completed sets will not be recreated.

More Information


Documents will not feed through the document feeder

Clearing a Misfeed in the Bottom of the Document Feeder

Clearing a Misfeed in the Middle of the Document Feeder

Clearing Misfeeds in the Top and Bottom of the Document Feeder

690 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Clearing a Misfeed in the Bottom of the Document Feeder

The device displays status code 05-340-00 or 05-363-00.

The message on the device touch screen reads: Misfeed in Document Feeder. Lift the Document

Feeder.








4. Rotate the green knob anti-clockwise to free any jammed document. The green knob is located underneath the front right corner of the section you just raised.


6. Raise the green latch until it clicks back into position.

7. Close the document feeder.



More Information



Clearing a Misfeed in the Top of the Document Feeder


User Guide 691


®

5945/5955


Clearing a Misfeed in the Middle of the Document Feeder



Document Feeder Top Cover.












More Information






692 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Clearing Misfeeds in the Top and Bottom of the Document Feeder

The device displays the status code 05-362-00


Document Feeder Top Cover.













9. Raise the green latch until it clicks back into position.

10. Close the document feeder.



User Guide 693


®

5945/5955

More Information






Clearing Jams in the Office Finisher

Clearing Jams in the Top of the Office Finisher


The message on the device touch screen reads: Paper Jam in Finisher. Open the Finisher Front

Door.



1. Open the finisher door.

2. Rotate knob 5a anti-clockwise.

3. Lower handle 5b by pulling moving it in a clockwise arc.

4. Rotate knob 5c clockwise until any jammed pages can be removed.

5. Remove any jammed pages.

Note: If the page tore while it was being removed, re-assemble the sheet and any pieces to confirm that nothing has been left in the device.

6. Raise handle 5b until it clicks back into position.


8. If the door does not shut easily check you have returned all the latches to their original position, then close the door.

694 User Guide


®

5945/5955

More Information


Repeated paper jams, misfeeds or multi sheet feeds

Clearing Jams in the Output Tray of the Office Finisher


Clearing Jams in the Output Tray of the Office Finisher


The message on the device touch screen reads: Paper Jam in Finisher. Open the Finisher Top

Cover.



1. Open the cover on top of the finisher.


3. Close the cover on top of the finisher.

4. Check the output tray is not blocked by other print jobs, debris, or any other item left on the tray.

More Information



Clearing Jams in the Top of the Office Finisher


User Guide 695


®

5945/5955

Clearing Jams in the Output Tray of the Office Finisher


The message on the device touch screen reads: Paper Jam in Finisher. Remove any sheets from

the main output tray.



1. Pull any jammed pages free from the output tray. Pull the pages from the device in the direction they were travelling, not at an angle (or the page may tear).

More Information





696 User Guide


®

5945/5955

New Office Finisher Booklet Maker

Clearing Jams in the New Office Finisher Booklet Maker



Door.




2. Rotate knob 5a anti-clockwise.

3. Lower handle 5b by pulling moving it in a clockwise arc.

4. Rotate knob 5c clockwise until any jammed pages can be removed.



6. Raise handle 5b until it clicks back into position.



More Information



Clearing Jams in the Top of the New Office Finisher Booklet Maker

Clearing Jams in the Output Tray of the New Office Finisher Booklet Maker

Clearing Jams in the Booklet Maker Entry Area of the New Office Finisher Booklet Maker

Clearing Jams in the Booklet Maker Area of the New Office Finisher Booklet Maker

User Guide 697


®

5945/5955

Clearing Jams in the Top of the New Office Finisher Booklet Maker


The message on the device touch screen reads: Paper Jam in Finisher. Open the Finisher Top

Cover.



1. Open the cover on top of the finisher.


3. Close the cover on top of the finisher.

4. Check the output tray is not blocked by other print jobs, debris, or any other item left on the tray.

More Information



Clearing Jams in the New Office Finisher Booklet Maker




698 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Clearing Jams in the Output Tray of the New Office Finisher Booklet Maker


The message on the device touch screen reads: Paper Jam in Finisher. Remove any sheets from

the main output tray.




More Information







User Guide 699


®

5945/5955

Clearing Jams in the Booklet Maker Entry Area of the New Office Finisher Booklet Maker



Door.




2. Rotate the indented green knob above label R8 anti-clockwise until the handle is in the unlocked position.

3. Pinch catch 6 and move it to the left to release any pages trapped in the finisher (pages may be trapped in both the top and bottom of this area).



5. Move catch 6 to the right until it clicks back into position.

6. Rotate the indented knob above label R8 clockwise until the handle is in the locked position.



More Information







700 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Clearing Jams in the Booklet Maker Area of the New Office Finisher Booklet Maker



Door.



1. Open the finisher door.

2. Rotate the indented green knob above label R8 anti-clockwise until the handle is in the unlocked position.

3. Rotate the large green indented knob to the right of label R8 clockwise until the jammed paper is released into the finisher output tray.



5. Pinch catch 6 and move it to the left to release any pages trapped in the finisher (pages may be trapped in both the top and bottom of this area).


7. Move catch 6 to the right until it clicks back into position.

8. Rotate the indented knob above label R8 clockwise until the handle is in the locked position.



More Information







User Guide 701


®

5945/5955

Clearing Jams in the Horizontal Transport to the Finisher

The device displays the status code 10-200-00

The message on the device touch screen reads: Jam in Horizontal Transport. Raise Horizontal

Transport Cover.

The horizontal transport is optional and may not be fitted to your device.


1. Open the horizontal transport top. This is located underneath the touch screen.


Note: Make sure you check for pages jammed at the left end of the transport, they can be difficult to spot as only a small amount of the page will be visible.

3. If a page has jammed at the right end of the transport very slowly and gently pull it to the left until it is released from the device.


!

WARNING

Do not attempt to undock the finisher to get better access to the jam from the right side of the device. The finisher is balanced as part of the device and may fall over if undocked.

4. Lower the horizontal transport top and press gently until it clicks into place.

Note: If your job keeps jamming in the horizontal transport area check that the pages aren’t being prevented from leaving the transport by a jam in the finisher unit.

More Information






702 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Clearing Jams in the Center Output Tray


The message on the device touch screen reads Paper Jam Inside Left Side Door.

Jams in the center output tray may result in a message saying there’s a jam in the left door. Check the left door and clear any jams before checking the center tray for jams.

This output tray is only present on your device if you do not have a finisher fitted.



2. Remove any jammed pages that are sticking out from the device. Pages may be jammed at the top, middle and bottom of the device.

Note: If a page is jammed near the door hinge and is difficult to grasp, try holding the center of the page to pull it free (there is more space to grasp the center of the page than the edges).

Note: If a page was fed from tray 3 and is jammed near the door it may also be possible to remove the page by opening tray 3 and then pulling the jammed page down. Take great care if attempting to remove paper this way as it is very easy to tear the sheet and cause a jam that only an engineer visit can resolve.

3. Locate the green tab near the top left corner of the door.

4. Hold the door with one hand and use the other to pull the green tab towards the device engine.

You will need to pull the tab firmly.


6. Lower the green tab and gently push it towards the door until it you hear it click into place.


User Guide 703


®

5945/5955


9. Check the output guide is still fitted correctly and has not been pulled into the tray when a previous jam was cleared.

More Information



Clearing Jams in the Paper Path for 1-Sided Jobs


Left Door

Clearing Jams in the Paper Path for 1-Sided Jobs


The message on the device touch screen reads: Paper Jam Inside Left Side Door.



Note: For single sided jobs any jammed paper will be sticking out from the device engine, not from the door. The paper may be jammed at the top, middle and bottom of the device. For 2sided jobs the paper may also be jammed in the door.



704 User Guide


®

5945/5955


More Information




Clearing Jams in the Paper Path for 2-Sided Jobs













User Guide 705

General Care and Troubleshooting

More Information




Trays

Tray 1

Clearing Jams in Tray 1 (4 Tray Device)


The message on the device touch screen reads: Clear the misfeed in Tray 1.

WorkCentre

®

5945/5955

1. Open tray 1.

2. Remove any misfed pages.

3. Check the tray guides are set correctly for the size of media loaded in the tray.

4. If the paper keeps jamming open a new pack and load fresh paper, or if the paper is still relatively new refresh the existing stack.

• Fan the media to ensure no pages are stuck together.

• Remove the top few sheets from the stack.

• Turn the stack over so that the bottom sheet becomes the top sheet.

5. Close tray 1.

More Information


Clearing Jams in Tray 2 (4 Tray Device)





706 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Tray 2



The message on the device touch screen reads: Clear the misfeed in Tray 2.

1. Open tray 2.







5. Close tray 2.

More Information






User Guide 707


®

5945/5955

Tray 3














1. Open tray 3.






708 User Guide


®

5945/5955

4. Close tray 3.

More Information





Clearing Jams in Tray 4


If the message on the device touch screen reads: Clear the misfeed in Tray 4.

If the message on the device touch screen reads: Paper Jam Inside Left Side Door clear the jam inside the left side door before clearing tray 4.

User Guide 709


®

5945/5955

Clear Tray 4

1. Open tray 4.

2. If required, lift the handle to open the transport cover.





• Flip the paper over in the paper tray.

5. If required, close the transport cover.

6. Close tray 4.

Clear Left Side Door then Clear Tray 4



Note: For single sided jobs any jammed paper will be sticking out from the device engine, not from the door. The paper may be jammed at the top, middle and bottom of the device. For 2sided jobs the paper may also be jammed in the door.


4. Open tray 4.

5. If required, lift the handle to open the transport cover.


7. If required, close the transport cover.

8. Close tray 4.

More Information






710 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Clearing Jams in the Bypass Tray

The device displays the status code: 75-150-00.

The message on the device touch screen reads: Tray 5 is unavailable. Empty and reload.


2. Fan the media to ensure no pages are stuck together.


More Information



User Guide 711


®

5945/5955

Troubleshooting Tips

The device will not power on

• Check to see that the device is not in Energy Saver mode as indicated by the green light on the control panel.

• To re-activate the device when in Low Power or Sleep mode, press the Power button. The device takes longer to recover from Sleep mode.

If the issue is not with the device, check the power outlet.

• Plug another electrical appliance into the outlet and see if it operates properly.

• Plug the device into a different outlet.

• Check the outlet has a voltage or frequency that matches the device specifications.

• If your device is specified for a power supply of 50 Hz and 10 A it should be connected to a 220-240 V supply.

• If your device is specified for a power supply of 60 Hz and 15 A connect it to a 110-127 V supply.

More Information




Documents will not feed through the document feeder

• Ensure the originals are in good condition.

• Check nothing is resting on the document feeder cover or overhanging into the input tray.

• Ensure that all staples, paper clips and Post-it notes have been removed from the originals.

• Ensure that the paper tray is not filled above the MAX line.

• Check to see if the document set is fully inserted into the document feeder.

• Ensure that the edge guides are adjusted to touch the sides of the paper.

• Check for obstructions or paper debris in the document feeder.

• Ensure that the document feeder cover is closed.

• Check that the device is Ready as indicated by a message on the touch screen.

• Ensure there are no bright lights directly overhead as these may confuse the size / preset sensor.

• Confirm that the media being fed is within the range specified for the device.

If everything appears correct but the problem persists turn the device off, wait 2 minutes and then switch it back on again.

More Information

Loading Documents



712 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Repeated paper jams, misfeeds or multi sheet feeds

If you clear a jam only to see the device jam again, there are some steps you can try before contacting the Xerox Support Centre.

1. Check the paper path for obstructions. If paper repeatedly jams at the same place, check the path immediately after that position in case part of a jammed sheet is still blocking the path.

2. Make certain that all the handles and levers are in the correct (home) position. Follow the instructions displayed on the touch screen.

3. Check that the touch screen is displaying the correct size and type for the media in use.

4. Ensure that the paper tray is not filled above the MAX line.

5. Ensure that the edge guides are adjusted to touch the sides of the paper.

6. Turn the stack over so that the bottom sheet becomes the top sheet.

7. Fan the media to ensure no pages are stuck together.

9. Confirm that the media being fed is within the range specified for the device.


More Information




Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4




Repeated Check Tray messages

• Adjust the edge guides against the stack of paper in the tray.

• If the edge guides were not set against the paper in the tray when Start was selected, delete the job in the job queue and begin again.

• Check that the touch screen is displaying the correct size and type for the media in use.


More Information



Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4



User Guide 713


®

5945/5955

Paper curls

• Load the paper in the paper trays with the seam side of the paper up. Load the paper in the

Bypass Tray with the seam side down.

• Load non-standard media in the Bypass Tray.

• If the paper curls excessively, flip the paper over in the applicable paper tray.

• Check media has been stored correctly.

More Information




Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4


The finisher does not stack the output correctly

• Unload the finisher tray frequently especially if stacking mixed-size paper.

• Do not remove stapled sets while the finisher is compiling.

• Check the paper tray guides are locked into position against the paper.

• When using large paper, remove any output contained in the Stacker Tray.





• Check the correct paper size has been selected for the paper loaded in the tray.

• Check that the printer is not positioned near a source of draft.

• Check the correct paper type, such as the weight, has been selected for the paper loaded in the tray.

More Information



Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4


Paper curls


The centre output tray does not stack the output correctly

• Unload the centre output tray frequently especially if stacking mixed-size paper.





714 User Guide


®

5945/5955


• Check that the printer is not positioned near a source of draft.


More Information



Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4


Paper curls


The finisher does not staple or hole punch correctly

• To correct stapling problems, ensure the maximum number of sheets is not exceeded for the finisher and weight of paper being used.

• Check the correct option has been selected on the touch screen.

• Check the touch screen for a fault message indicating no staples or a staple jam. Replace the staple cartridge or clear the jam.

• When using large paper, remove any output contained in the Stacker Tray.

• Check that the hole punch waste container is not full. The hole punch waste container collects waste from the hole punch.


• Check the paper tray guides are locked into position against the paper.


More Information



Loading Tray 3

Loading Tray 4





Emptying the Hole Punch Waste

Stray marks or black marks from hole punched originals are not removed

• Use the Edge Erase option to erase the edge with the punched holes.

• Copy from the document glass with the document feeder down.

More Information


User Guide 715


®

5945/5955

Pages are out of sequence or upside down when the Booklet Creation feature is used

• Ensure that the originals are in the correct sequence.

• Feed LEF originals to SEF orientated paper.

• Enable the display options for Booklet Creation and ensure that the correct sequence is selected (i.e. Left to Right or Right to Left).


More Information


Creating a Booklet Layout using the PCL Print Driver

Creating a Booklet Layout using the PostScript Print Driver

Creating a Booklet Layout using the XPS Print Driver

Folding Booklets using the Mac Print Driver

The output is blank

• Ensure the originals are loaded either face up in the document feeder or face down on the document glass in the top right position.

• Ensure the Xerographic Module is seated and turning correctly.

More Information

Loading Documents

There are streaks, lines or spots on the prints

• Clean the document glass and, if using the document feeder, also clean the Constant Velocity

Transport glass (the thin strip of glass to the left of the document glass), especially near the plastic ramp on the glass.

• Clean the white underside of the document feeder/document cover.

• Clean the document feeder roller.

• Clean the halo guide.

• Clean the Charge Scorotron and Transfer Corotron, if available on your device.

• Check the paper tray guides are against the paper stack.

• Run the job from the document glass.

• Check the quality of the original. Use Edge Erase to remove lines from the edges of the document.

• Use the Background Suppression feature.

• Load fresh paper.

• Do not use heavily embossed paper.

More Information



Cleaning the Control Panel, Touch Screen, Document Feeder and Output Trays


716 User Guide


®

5945/5955

Image Loss

• When copying a document from a larger paper size to a smaller size, use Auto% to reduce the image onto the smaller size.

• Use reduction i.e. copy at 90% instead of 100%.

• Use the Auto Center feature and run the job again.

• If scanning from the document glass use Original Size to define the document size, refer to

Original Size in the Copy section. Register the document in the top left corner and copy with the cover down.

• Do not use heavily embossed paper.

• Check the print settings are correct (especially if you are printing from a PDF document).

• If the image loss is due to wrinkled paper, load fresh paper into the tray.

More Information

Reducing or Enlarging Copies



The output images are blurred


• If copying from the document glass, check the quality of the originals, close the cover and try again. Ensure that the original is entirely flat against the document glass.

• Use Original Size to specify the size of the original.

• Clean the Charge Scorotron and Transfer Corotron, if available on your device.

• Clean the document glass and if using the document feeder also clean the Constant Velocity

Transport Glass (the thin strip of glass to the left of the document glass), especially near the plastic ramp on the glass.

More Information



Characters are missing from the output


• Try using a smoother paper.

• Select darken if the original is light or the font is colored.

More Information



Adjusting the Lightness of your Print using the PostScript Driver

Adjusting the Lightness of your Print using the Mac Print Driver

User Guide 717


®

5945/5955

There are gloss variations (coining)

• Check the quality of the original.

• If the original has large areas of solid density, adjust the contrast.

More Information


There is a double image or show through (ghosting)

• Check the quality of the original.

• Clean the document glass, if it is being used.

• Rotate the original 180 degrees and try the job again.

More Information


The device cannot sense the size of the original on the glass

• Use Original Size to specify the size of the original.

• Rescan the original, leaving the cover raised.

More Information


Jobs scan but do not print

• Some jobs require image processing before printing. This may take as long as 2 seconds per page.

• Press the Job Status button and check the Active Jobs list to determine if a job is processing.

There may be a job in the list with a status of “paused”. Delete this job if it remains in the state over 3 minutes.

• This may possibly be a result of an incorrect feature combination. The software may need to be reset.

More Information


The output does not reflect the selections made on the touch screen

• Press the Clear All button between jobs.

• If a Save or OK button displays on the touch screen, ensure you select the button after each option you choose.

The fax image is reduced on transmission

• Confirm the original size of the documents. Documents may be reduced on the available paper supply at the receiving fax machine.

718 User Guide


®

5945/5955

More Information



Specifying the Size of the Original to be Faxed (Server Fax)

Specifying the Size of the Original to be sent by Internet Fax

The device does not answer incoming fax calls

• Change the Auto Answer Delay setting to 0 seconds.


More Information


The device answers incoming fax calls but does not accept incoming data

• If the job contains several graphics, the device may not have enough memory. The device will not answer if memory is low.

• Remove stored documents and jobs and wait for existing jobs to complete. This will increase the available memory.

More Information

Deleting Saved Jobs using Internet Services

Fault messages will not clear

• There may be occasions when a fault is cleared but the message will not clear. Reboot your device by powering OFF and ON using the button on the control panel.

• Wait approximately 20 seconds before turning the device back ON. Any incomplete jobs in the jobs list will be lost.

• Only use the correct power off process to reboot your device. Damage may occur to your device if power is removed by other means.

More Information



"Start cannot be accepted at this time" Message is Displayed

If the device displays the message "Start cannot be accepted at this time, please try again", reboot your device by powering OFF and ON using the button on the control panel.



More Information



User Guide 719


®

5945/5955

The Device User Interface does not Respond

There may be occasions when the Device User Interface will not respond. Reboot your device by powering OFF and ON using the button on the control panel.



More Information



Print job(s) status stuck at Processing

• Ask your System Administrator to disconnect the network cable and perform a software reset

(the instructions to perform the reset are in the System Administrator Guide).

• Repeat the software reset 2 times.

More Information



Warming up message continuously displays

• Check to see if there is a paper jam. Clear the paper path of all obstructions.

• Turn the device off, wait 2 minutes, then turn it on again.

More Information




For any additional help visit our customer web site at www.xerox.com

or contact the Xerox Support

Center quoting the machine serial number.

The Xerox Support Center will want to know the nature of the problem, the machine serial number, the fault code (if any) plus the name and location of your company.

More Information


720 User Guide